Home

Viewsonic Pro9500

Contents

1.
2. ViewSonic 269 Pro9500 PYCC Projektoriohjelmiston k ytt oikeussopimus Projektorin ohjelmisto koostuu useista itsen isist ohjelmistomoduuleista jotka on suojattu yrityksemme ja tai kolman
3. ViewSonic 166 Pro9500 3 10 Projector Control Continued Description SETUP AUTO KEYSTONE EXECUTE Performs the automatic keystone distortion setting KEYSTONE V Adjusts the vertical keystone distortion setting KEYSTONE H Adjusts the horizontal keystone distortion setting PERFECT FIT Adjusts the shape of the projected image in each of the corners and sides AUTO ECO MODE Turns on off the automatic eco mode function ECO MODE Selects the eco mode MIRROR Selects the mirror status STANDBY MODE Selects the standby mode MONITOR OUT COMPUTER IN1 Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPUTER IN1 input port is selected MONITOR OUT COMPUTER IN2 Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPUTER IN2 input port is selected MONITOR OUT LAN Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the LAN input port is selected MONITOR OUT USB TYPEA Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the USB TYPE A input port is selected MONITOR OUT USB TYPEB Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the USB TYPE B input port is selected MONITOR OUT HDMI Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the HDMI input port is selected MONITOR OUT COMPONENT Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPONENT input port is selected MONITOR OUT S VIDEO Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the S VIDEO input port is selected MONITOR OUT
4. 34 ASPECT AUTO KEYSTONE Q KEYSTONE KEYSTONE PERFECT FIT PICTURE MODE ECO MODE Mirror RESET FILTER TIME LANGUAGE ADVANCED MENU EXIT PICTURE men u a u u u ul kSsusupussuuasanuwawsaunususkawasa 36 BRIGHTNESS CONTRAST GAMMA COLOR TEMP COLOR TINT SHARPNESS ACTIVE IRIS MY MEMORY IMAGE mendwi u 39 ASPECT OVER SCAN V POSITION H PosiTION H PHASE H sizE AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE INPUT menua Rc 42 PROGRESSIVE VIDEO NR COLOR SPACE COMPONENT VIDEO FORMAT FORMAT RANGE COMPUTER IN FRAME LOCK RESOLUTION SETUP 2 2 2 lt 46 AUTO KEYSTONE C KEYSTONE KEYSTONE PERFECT FIT AUTO ECO MODE Eco MODE MIRROR STANDBY MODE MONITOR OUT ViewSonic 2 Pro9500 AUDIO menuwa u u u 49 VoLUME SPEAKER AUDIO SOURCE AUDIO Mic LEVEL Mic VOLUME SCREEN Menu 51 LANGUAGE MENU POSITION BLANK START UP MyScreen MyScre
5. GNU General Public License Version 2 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 Free Software Foundation Inc http www viewsonic com products pro9500 htm
6. continued on next page ViewSonic 34 Pro9500 Description Using the lt gt buttons turns off on the Eco mode MODE See the MODE item in SETUP menu MIRROR Using the lt gt buttons switches the mode for mirror status See the MIRROR item in SETUP menu Performing this item resets all of the EASY MENU items except the RESET FILTER TIME and LANGUAGE A dialog is displayed for confirmation Selecting the OK using the gt button performs resetting The usage time of the air filter is shown in the menu Performing this item resets the filter time which counts usage time of the air filter PIETER TIME A dialog is displayed for confirmation Selecting the OK using the gt button performs resetting See the FILTER TIME item in OPTION menu Using the lt gt buttons changes the display language LANGUAGE See the LANGUAGE item in SCREEN menu Press the or ENTER button to use the menu of PICTURE ADVANCED MENU IMAGE INPUT SETUP AUDIO SCREEN OPTION NETWORK or SECURITY EXIT Press the lt or ENTER button to finish the OSD menu ViewSonic 35 Pro9500 AKG MO X ADVANCED MENU 2 SELECT From the PICTURE menu items shown in the table s s below can be performed LEM Select an item using the cursor buttons and press 8 4 the gt cursor button or ENTER button to execute the Ho A item Then perform it acc
7. 20 Using as a simple PC mouse amp 20 Power on off 21 Turning on the 10844 21 Turning Off the dee Leder cet tuse cron do dna de RE Ra Ra ER 21 Operating 22 Adjusting the VOIUMC ve 22 Temporarily muting the 22 Selecting an input signal 22 Searching an input 9 senem 24 Selecting an aspect ratio enn 24 Adjusting the projector s 25 Adjusting the IONS Sis seni ran a FEX ex RE RTE aR 26 Using the automatic adjustment 27 Adjusting the POS 27 Correcting the distortion 28 Using the magnify feature 2 29 Temporarily freezing the 31 Temporarily blanking the screen 31 Using the menu function err 32 EASY MENU
8. ML MU 180 6 4 21 x ap b t et f LO e he 181 7 Other Functions 182 CV E mail Alerts eret 182 7 2 Projector Management using SNMP 184 F Event Scheduling itur rt rx naa PR 184 7 4 Command Control via the Network 188 8 Troubleshooting u 193 Appendix u uu P 196 R9232 E 196 219 Instant Stack Guide a 221 End User License Agreement for the projector software 258 ViewSonic 5 Pro9500 Introduction Features The projector provides you with the broad use by the following features v This projector has a variety of I O ports that supposedly cover for any business scene The HDMI port can support various image equipment which have digital interface to get clearer pictures on a screen This projector has a 1 7 times optical zoom horizontal and vertical manual lens shift allowing flexible installation Ifyou insert a USB storage device such as USB memory into the USB TYPE A port and select the port as the input source you can view images stored in the device Y This projector can be controlled and monitored via LAN connection Y The built in 16W speaker can deliver sufficient sound
9. Remember that incorrect network settings on this manean Sii projector may cause trouble on the network Be sure JH to consult with your network administrator before connecting to existing access point on your network Select NETWORK from the main menu to access the following functions T M Select an item using the A V cursor buttons on the projector or remote control and press the cursor button on the projector or remote control or ENTER button on the remote control to execute the item Then perform it according to the following table See the Network Guide for details of NETWORK operation COMPUTER IN 1 1024 x 768 860Hz NOTE If you are not utilizing SNTP 3 9 Date Time Settings the Network Guide then you must set the DATE AND TIME during the initial installation The network communication control is disabled while the projector is in standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item of SETUP menu is set to SAVING Please connect the network communication to the projector after setting the STANDBY MODE to NORMAL Description Selecting this item displays the SETUP Menu for the network Use the A V buttons to select an item and the gt or ENTER button on the remote ONS SERVER control to perform the item amp DATE AND TIME ERETURN Use the A Y buttons to turn DHCP on off lt gt OFF Select OFF when the network does not have DHCP DHCP enabled When th
10. continued on next page ViewSonic 43 Pro9500 Description The computer input signal type for COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 ports can be set 1 Use the A Y buttons to select the COMPUTER IN port to be set 2 Use the lt gt buttons to select 5 the computer input signal type AUTO lt gt SYNC ON G OFF COMPUTER N2 Selecting the AUTO mode allows you to input a sync on G signal or component video signal from the port the AUTO mode the picture may be distorted with certain input signals In such a case remove the signal connector so that no signal is received and select the SYNC ON G OFF and then reconnect the signal COMPUTER IN Set the frame lock function on off for each port 1 Use the A Y buttons to select the input ports 2 Use the lt gt buttons to turn the oo FRAME LOCK frame lock function on off ON lt gt OFF amp FRAME LOCK COMPUTER IN 1 This item can be performed only on a signal with a vertical frequency of 49 to 51Hz 59 to 61 Hz When ON is selected moving pictures are displayed more smoothly continued on next page ViewSonic 44 Pro9500 Description RESOLUTION ViewSonic The resolution for the COMPUTER IN1 and COMPUTER IN2 input signals can be set on this projector 1 In the INPUT menu select the RESOLUTION using the A V buttons and press the gt button The RESOLUTION menu will be displayed STANDARD 1024 x
11. NOTE Web Remote Control does not support repeat function that performs an action while holding a button clicked down Since the repeat function is not available click the button repeatedly as many times as you require Even if you hold the button clicked down for a while the Web Remote Control sends your request command one time only Release the button then click it again When the POWER button is pushed a message window comes up to confirm the operation To control the power push OK otherwise push Cancel The PAGE DOWN and PAGE UP buttons on the Web Remote Control cannot be used as mouse emulation function of the projector ViewSonic 171 Pro9500 3 12 Projector Status nona b ED rater Time OS Projector Status Displays and configures the current projector status Item Description Error Status Displays the current error status Lamp Time Displays the usage time for the current lamp Filter Time Displays the usage time for the current filter Power Status Displays the current power status Input Status Displays the current input signal source Blank On Off Displays the current Blank on off status Mute Displays the current Mute on off status Freeze ViewSonic Displays the current Freeze status 172 Pro9500 3 13 Network Restart Restarts the projector s network co
12. Security slot ANWARNING p Do not use the security bar and slot to prevent the projector from falling down since it is not designed for it ANCAUTION Do not place anti theft chain or wire near the exhaust vents It may become too hot NOTE The security bar and slot is not comprehensive theft prevention measures It is intended to be used as supplemental theft prevention measure ViewSonic 18 Pro9500 Installing the batteries Please insert the batteries into the remote control before using it If the remote control starts to malfunction try to replace the batteries If you will not use the remote control for long period remove the batteries from the remote control and store them in a safe place 1 Holding the hook part of the battery cover remove it 2 Align and insert the two AA batteries HITACHI MAXELL Part No LR6 or R6P according to their plus and minus terminals as indicated in the remote control 3 Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow and snap it back into place ANWARNING p Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as directed Improper use may result in battery explosion cracking or leakage which could result in fire injury and or pollution of the surrounding environment Be sure to use only the batteries specified Do not use batteries of different types at the same time Do not mix a new battery with used one Make sure the plus
13. continued on next page ViewSonic 71 9500 Description To change from Multi PC mode to Single PC mode select one of computers in the dialog using the 4 gt buttons and press the ENTER or INPUT button Press the button to choose OK and then press ENTER or INPUT again The image for the selected computer is displayed on full screen To change from Single PC mode to Multi PC mode press gt button to choose OK in the dialog and press the ENTER or INPUT button The display mode is changed For details on how to switch the display mode to Multi PC mode on your computer see lt JC the section 2 1 3 Switching the display mode in the Network Guide MULTI PC MODE continued PRESENTATION Presenter mode setting of the selected continued computer becomes valid when the display mode is changed to Single PC mode 52 MULTI PC MODE Also the Presenter mode setting 1 becomes invalid when the aM display mode is changed to Multi RES PC mode regardless the setting ESSE on the computers For details see the section 2 2 2 Presenter mode in the Network Guide Selecting this item displays the user name This function helps you identify from which computer the current image is sent You can set user names for each computer on LiveViwer For details see the section 2 2 3 Display User Name in the Network Guide DISPLAY USER NAME cont
14. buttons and pressing the gt or ENTER button performs each function SAVE 1 lt gt SAVE 2 lt gt SAVE 3 lt gt SAVE 4 LOAD 4 amp LOAD 3 LOAD 2 LOAD 1 SAVE 1 SAVE 2 SAVE 3 SAVE 4 Performing a SAVE function saves the current adjustment data into the memory linked in the number included in the function s name Remember that the current data being stored of a memory will be lost by saving new data into the memory MY MEMORY LOAD 1 LOAD 2 LOAD 3 LOAD 4 Performing a LOAD function loads the data from the memory linked in the number included in the function s name and adjusts the picture automatically depending on the data The LOAD functions whose linked memory has no data are skipped Remember that the current adjusted condition will be lost by loading data If you want to keep the current adjustment please save it before performing a LOAD function There may be some noise and the screen may flicker for a moment when loading data This is not malfunction You can perform the LOAD function using MY BUTTON Please see MY BUTTON item in OPTION menu ViewSonic 38 Pro9500 ManU From the IMAGE menu items shown in the table ADVANCED MENU _ 3 PICTURE ASPECT NORMAL below can be performed STEE s Select an item using the cursor buttons and SETUP GHPOSTON 294 2 AUDIO 2 press the gt cursor button or ENTER button to EE Een amp
15. buttons on the SCREEN menu to select SOURCE and press the gt or ENTER button The SOURCE NAME menu will be displayed 2 Use the buttons on the SOURCE NAME menu to select the port to be named and press the button The SOURCE NAME dialog will be displayed Right side of the menu is blank until a name is specified 3 Select an icon you would like to assign to the port in the SOURCE NAME dialog The name assigned to the port will also be automatically switched according to your icon selection Press the ENTER or INPUT button to determine your icon selection SOURCE NAME 4 Select a number you would like to assign to the port along with the icon You can select the number either from blank no number assigned 1 2 3 or 4 Then press the ENTER or INPUT button 5 If you would like to modify the name assigned to the port select CUSTOM NAME and press the ENTER or INPUT button continued on next page ViewSonic 54 Pro9500 Description 6 The current name will be displayed on the first line Use the 4 gt buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to select and enter characters To erase 1 character at one time press the RESET button or press the 4 and INPUT button at the same time Also if you move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and press the ENTER or INPUT button 1 character or all characters will E aa be erased The name can be a maximum p SOURCE NAME of 16 c
16. The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection by clicking the Network Restart on the main menu ViewSonic 175 Pro9500 5 Messenger Function The projector can display the text data transferred via the network on the screen The text data can be displayed on the screen in two ways that displays the text transferred from the computer on real time and the other chooses and displays the text data from the ones once stored in the projector abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUWXYZ B 0123456789 Today s Topics The chemical Today s Topics The chemical class is Cancale Display text data ex The PE is performed at gym because today due to bad weather Messenger function requires an exclusive application for your computer To edit transfer and display the text data use the application You can download it from the ViewSonic web site http www viewsonic com products pro9500 htm Refer to the manual for the application for the details of Messenger function and instructions of the application NOTE It is possible to store the text data up to 12 in the maximum Using MY BUTTON that registered MESSENGER can turn the displaying messenger text on off OPTION menu in the Operating Guide The text file also can be
17. FAX Email Australia New Zealand www viewsonic com au AUS 1800 880 818 NZ 0800 008 822 service au viewsonic com T Toll Free 1 866 463 4775 Canada www viewsonic com T Toll 1 424 233 2533 service ca viewsonic com F 1 909 468 3757 Europe www viewsoniceurope com www viewsoniceurope com uk support call desk Hong Kong www hk viewsonic com 852 3102 2900 service hk viewsonic com India www in viewsonic com T 1800 11 9999 service in viewsonic com Ireland Eire www viewsoniceurope com uk Wi vie Cark service_ie viewsoniceurope com support call desk Korea www kr viewsonic com T 080 333 2131 service kr viewsonic com America www viewsonic com la T 0800 4441185 soporte viewsonic com Argentina Latin America Chile www viewsonic com la T 1230 020 7975 soporte viewsonic com reside www viewsonic com la 01800 9 157235 soporte viewsonic com Latin America Mexico www viewsonic com la T 001 8882328722 soporte viewsonic com Renta y Datos 29 SUR 721 COL LA PAZ 72160 PUEBLA PUE Tel 01 222 891 55 77 CON 10 LINEAS Electroser Av Reforma No 403Gx39 y 41 97000 M rida Yucatan Tel 01 999 925 19 16 Other places please refer to http www viewsonic com la soporte index htm Mexico Latin America Peru www viewsonic com la 0800 54565 soporte viewsonic com Macau www hk viewsonic com T 853 2870 0303 service hk viewsonic com Mid
18. HIGH NORMAL AUTO ADJUST Using the A V buttons to select one of the mode When the DISABLE is selected the automatic adjustment feature is disabled FINE lt gt FAST lt gt DISABLE t f FINE Finer tuning including H SIZE adjustment FAST Faster tuning setting H SIZE to prearranged data for the input signal Depending on conditions such as input image signal cable to the projector environment around the projector etc the automatic adjustment may not work correctly In such a case please choose DISABLE to disable the automatic adjustment and make adjustment manually GHOST 1 Select a color element of ghost using amp SERVICE GHOST the lt P gt buttons R G B 0 0 0 EX 2 Adjust the selected element using the buttons to disappear ghost FILTER MESSAGE Use the A V button to set the timer for notifying by the message when to replace the filter unit 100h lt gt 200h lt gt 500h lt gt 1000h 2000h lt gt 50001 lt gt OFF After choosing an item except OFF the message REMINDER HRS PASSED will appear after the timer reaches the interval time set by this feature When the OFF is chosen the message will not appear Utilize this feature to keep the air filter clean setting the suitable time according to your environment of this projector Please take care of the filter unit periodically even if there is no message If the air filter becomes to be blocked by dust or
19. Ko V USB LAN COMPUTER IN2 p 2 METTI AUDIO OUT x evice O REMOTE CONTROL MONITOR T CRAL CONTROL AUDIO IN2 L coMPoNENT NOTE If an oversized USB storage device blocks the LAN port use a USB extension cable to connect the USB storage device continued on next page ViewSonic 15 Pro9500 Connecting with your devices continued Digital VCR DVD Blu ray Disc player video AUDIO OUT VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT device L Y CriPr USB TYPEA DC5V 0 5A REMOTE CONTROL CONTROL cowPoNENT NOTE HDMI port of this model is compatible with HDCP High band width Digital Content Protection and therefore capable of displaying a video signal from HDCP compatible DVD players or the like The HDMI supports the following video signals 4801 60 480 60 5761 50 576 50 720 50 60 10801 50 60 1080 50 60 This projector be connected with another equipment that has HDMI connector but with some equipment the projector may not work properly something like no video Be sure to use an HDMI cable that has the HDMI logo When the projector is connected with a device having DVI connector use a DVI to cable to connect with the
20. 4 The wireless connection will be established Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 1 Contact the network administrator to find out the setting on the access point 2 f you use an encryption you need to set it Contact the network administrator to check the encryption key that is set in the projector The encryption key is always shown as 3 To find the network setting on the projector refer to the NOTE 4 f you use Subnet mask except Class A B C please set it ViewSonic 125 Pro9500 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued Wired LAN 1 Enter the following information for the UNUM NE projector s Subnet mask 7 255 255 255 128 example 2 Click the Connect 3 The network connection will be established Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the UE connection to your destination 1 If you use a Subnet mask other than Class A B or C this screen appears NOTE If you require the network setting information on the projector take the following procedure to find it out 1 Turn on the projector and make sure that the projector image is on screen 2 Press the MENU button on the remote control or the A buttons on the projector to show the menu on screen 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the ADVANCED MENU and use the gt cursor button to enter the item 4 Use the A cursor buttons to select the NETWO
21. ASPECT and OVER SCAN Operating Guide IMAGE menu COMPUTER IN Operating Guide INPUT menu MESSEAGE Operating Guide SCREEN menu MY BUTTON Operating Guide OPTION menu TEMPLATE Operating Guide SCREEN menu continued on next page iewSonic 244 Pro9500 3 STACK menu settings 7 Important information for Intellectual Stack continued The following functions are disabled Executing of AUTO KEYSTONE Operating Guide SETUP menu STANDBY MODE Operating Guide SETUP menu AUTO SEARCH Operating Guide OPTION menu Turning on off AUTO KEYSTONE Operating Guide OPTION menu DIRECT POWER ON Operating Guide OPTION menu MY SOURCE Operating Guide OPTION menu COMMUNICATION TYPE Operating Guide OPTION menu SERVICE COMMUNICATION The input source from the following ports cannot be selected USB TYPE A USB TYPE B LAN When Intellectual Stack is in use an error message will be displayed if an error occurs on any of the projectors When an error occurs a full dialog will be displayed Filter Error Cold Error on screen The full dialog changes to a small dialog ES after about 20 seconds without any key activity Full dialog While the small dialog is displayed pressing the lt button displays a full dialog again The numbers 1 and 2 above the projector icons represent the Main and Sub projectors respectively Refer to the o
22. HIGH BE EF 03 06 00 92 01 00 A1 20 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 31 F1 02 00 A1 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 75 F1 0200 A2 20 00 00 MIC VOLUME Increment BE EF 03 06 00 13 F1 04 00 A2 20 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 C2 FO 05 00 A2 20 00 00 continued on next page ViewSonic 214 Pro9500 Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code ENGLISH EF 03 06 00 F7 03 01 00 05 30 00 00 FRAN AIS EF 03 06 00 67 D2 0100 05 30 01 00 DEUTSCH EF 03 06 00 97 D2 01 00 05 30 02 00 ESPA OL EF 03 06 00 07 D3 01 00 05 30 03 00 ITALIANO EF 03 06 00 37 D1 01 00 05 30 04 00 NORSK EF 03 06 00 A7 DO 01 00 05 30 05 00 NEDERLANDS BE EF 03 06 00 57 00 01 00 05 30 06 00 PORTUGU S BE EF 03 06 00 C7 D1 01 00 05 30 07 00 03 06 00 37 04 0100 05 30 08 00 LANGUAGE 94 EF 03 06 00 A7 05 01 00 05 30 09 00 EF 03 06 00 37 DE 01 00 05 30 10 00 etg EF 03 06 00 57 05 01 00 05 30 00 SVENSKA EF 03 06 00 C7 04 01 00 05 30 0B 00 EF 03 06 00 F7 06 01 00 05 30 OC 00 SUOMI EF 03 06 0
23. Using the lt P gt buttons adjusts the horizontal size Small lt gt Large This item can be selected only for a computer signal This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B or HDMI port When this adjustment is excessive the picture may not be displayed correctly In such a case please reset the adjustment by pressing the RESET button on the remote control during this operation Images might appear degraded when this function is operated but itis not a malfunction Selecting this item performs the automatic adjustment feature For a computer signal The vertical position the horizontal position and the horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size prior to attempting to use this feature A dark picture may still be incorrectly adjusted Use a bright picture when adjusting For a video signal and s video signal The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be selected automatically This function is available only when the AUTO is selected for the VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT menu The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default For a component video signal The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default The horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted The automatic adjustment operation requires approx 10 sec
24. o do software em quest o at ao limite permitido pela lei aplic vel ViewSonic 265 Pro9500 m FJ PATE RI Ree MMA ASS PIR BPR RIAA S I BS RAM 817255 RRMA 5515383 2248 LB EL ERI AAA RIA Free Software Foundation Inc U S GNU General Public License Version 2 A GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 1 N FRA ARR BASH it AEA RAF MM 185 59S MT Mtt http www viewsonic com products pro9500 htm RAB 1 152 AE BY E BEA MAS 75 MERA ARR AEA ARE ETETRI SERA 0 BUR RRR REE ViewSonic 266 Pro9500 IEAA AS ASA 9 og 219 21401 AIEA PH 2 GA gl EH HoA HUE 8 ES SEE EIC 1 St El 21 EY 019 Ego e 0 0 PS MAPA ARADO mA SIL i in Free Software Foundation Inc 0 ol 4 GFE GNU Gener Public License Version 2 8 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 12 TE
25. Each licensee is addressed as you A library means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs which use some of those functions and data to form executables The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms A work based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code Pro9500 License Agreement means all the source code for modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what th
26. Full Screen mode Slideshow mode Supported storage media USB memory USB memory type USB hard disk and USB card reader type NOTE USB readers adapters that have more than one USB slot may not work if the adapter is acknowledged as multiple devices connected USB hubs may not work USB devices with security software may not work Be careful when inserting or removing a USB device Supported format FAT12 FAT16 and FAT32 NOTE NTFS is not supported Supported file format JPEG jpeg jpg Progressive is not supported Bitmap bmp 16bit mode and compressed bitmap is not supported PNG png Interlace PNG is not supported GIF gif NOTE Files with a resolution larger than the following are not supported Pro9500 1024X768 Files with a resolution smaller than 36x36 are not supported Files with a resolution smaller than 100x100 may not be displayed Some supported files may not be displayed Only a frame appears when the content of image data cannot be displayed in the Thumbnail mode ViewSonic 80 Pro9500 PC LESS Presentation continued Thumbnail mode The Thumbnail mode displays the images stored in a USB storage device on the Thumbnail screen Maximum 20 images are displayed in a screen If you wish you can jump into the Full Screen mode or Slideshow mode after you select some images in the Thumbnail mode The Thumbnail mode will be started as the
27. Register to profile Configure Network Settings Manually 3 The Edit profile screen will come up Sa 4 Edit the information required to be revised If you want to clear all information in the window click the Clear Es 5 Click the after the editing is completed If you don t want to store it click the Cancel 0 xi Projector settings 6 The edited profile data is stored and shown sma Z in the profile list with the new date created information if you click the OK Clear OK Cancel NOTE When you edit a profile data it is strongly recommended to check that the edited data can work properly by selecting the data at the Profile connection ViewSonic 138 Pro9500 1 9 Profile data continued 1 9 4 Registering My Connection One of the profile data which is often used can be registered as the My Connection profile data Once the data is registered all you need to do is to select the My Connection to connect to the network 1 Click the My Connection 2 The Add My Connection screen will come M u p Profile 2 11 30 2009 3 19 41 PM The currently selected profile data for the My 80 Connection is shown with a check mark C Projector name IP address Last connected the list pe eae eae Projector 3 192 168 1 103 11 30 2009 3
28. VIDEO Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the VIDEO input port is selected MONITOR OUT STANDBY ViewSonic Assigns the MONITOR OUT in the standby mode 167 Pro9500 3 10 Projector Control Continued Description AUDIO VOLUME Adjusts the volume setting SPEAKER Turns the built in speaker on off AUDIO SOURCE COMPUTER IN1 Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE COMPUTER IN1 input port AUDIO SOURCE COMPUTER IN2 Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE COMPUTER IN2 input port AUDIO SOURCE LAN Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE LAN input port AUDIO SOURCE USB TYPEA Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE USB TYPE A input port AUDIO SOURCE USB TYPE B Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE USB TYPE B input port AUDIO SOURCE HDMI Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE HDMI input port AUDIO SOURCE COMPONENT Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE COMPONENT input port AUDIO SOURCE S VIDEO Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE S VIDEO input port AUDIO SOURCE VIDEO Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE VIDEO input port AUDIO SOURCE STANDBY Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE in the standby mode HDMI AUDIO Selects the HDMI audio setting MIC LEVEL Selects the microphone level MIC VOLUME Adjusts the microphone volume setting SCREEN LANGUAGE Selects the language for the OSD MENU POSITION V Adjusts the vertical Menu position MENU POSITION H Adjust
29. displayed Please enter the Passcode divided 4 digit each in 3 boxes total 12 digit Example PASSCODE 1234 5678 9ABC The PassCode is a 12 digit code that can be found on the Startup Screen of the projector you are currently trying to connect to Bak comet Ex After entering the Passcode click the Connect to start the connection to the projector Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination If you click the Back the screen is back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method NOTE When entering the Passcode capital and small letters are not distinguished If you are using a Subnet mask other than Class B or C you will have to establish the connection manually If the manual setting screen is displayed please follow item 1 5 1 3 Troubleshooting W incorrect PassCode The incorrect Passcode was input Click the Back to return to the Please enter the PassCode screen Check the PassCode on the projector Screen and enter the code again ViewSonic 121 Pro9500 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued W A network connection could not be established Windows prevented network configuration changes network connection could not be established Windows network configuration changes Please insure that you are authorized to make these changes or check your security settings You may log in the Windows
30. 00 20 OB 00 USB TYPE B BEEF 03 06 00 07 01 00 00 20 OC 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 CD 02 02 00 00 20 00 00 BE EF 03 06 00 D9 D8 02 00 20 60 00 00 Example return 00 00 01 00 02 00 03 00 Error Status Get Normal Cover error Fan error Lamp error 04 00 05 00 07 00 08 00 Temp error Air flow error Cold error Filter error Get BE EF 03 06 00 7C D2 02 00 07 30 00 00 MAGNIFY Increment BE EF 03 06 00 1A D2 04 00 07 30 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 CB D3 05 00 07 30 00 00 Set NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 83 D2 01 00 02 30 00 00 FREEZE FREEZE BE EF 03 06 00 13 D3 01 00 02 30 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 BO D2 02 00 02 30 00 00 NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 23 F6 01 00 BA 30 00 00 CINEMA BE EF 03 06 00 B3 F7 01 00 BA 30 01 00 DYNAMIC BE EF 03 06 00 E3 F4 01 00 BA 30 04 00 Set BOARD BLACK BE EF 03 06 00 E3 EF 01 00 BA 30 20 00 BOARD GREEN EF 03 06 00 73 EE 01 00 30 21 00 PICTURE WHITEBOARD BE EF 03 06 00 83 EE 01 00 BA 30 22 00 MODE Daylight Mode BE EF 03 06 00 23 E2 01 00 BA 30 30 00 BE EF 03 06 00 10 F6 02 00 BA 30 00 00 Example return Get 00 00 01 00 04 00 10 00 Normal Cinema Dynamic Custom 20 00 21 00 22 00 40 00 BOARD BLACK BOARD GREEN WHITEBOARD DAY TIME Get BE EF 03 06 00 89 D2 02 00 03 20 00 00 BRIGHTNESS Increment BE EF 03 06 00 EF D2
31. 01 00 01 30 03 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 4 02 02 00 01 30 00 00 NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 06 02 01 00 01 60 00 00 38 SAVING BE EF 03 06 00 46 D3 01 00 01 60 01 00 Get EF 03 06 00 E5 02 02 00 01 60 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 F4 01 00 BO 20 00 00 OFF BE EF 03 06 00 CE B5 01 00 BO 20 FF 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 OD F4 02 00 BO 20 00 00 COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 CE F7 01 00 B4 20 04 00 Set OFF BE EF 03 06 00 FE B4 01 00 B4 20 FF 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 3D 5 02 00 B4 20 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 EF 03 06 00 F2 F4 01 00 B5 20 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER 2 BE EF 03 06 00 32 F6 01 00 B5 20 04 00 COMPONENT OFF BE EF 03 06 00 02 B5 01 00 B5 20 FF 00 Get EF 03 06 00 C1 F4 02 00 B5 20 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 EF 03 06 00 86 F5 01 00 B2 20 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER 2 EF 03 06 00 46 F7 01 00 B2 20 04 00 S VIDEO OFF BE EF 03 06 00 76 B4 01 00 B2 20 FF 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 B5 F5 02 00 B2 20 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 C2 F5 01 00 B1 20 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER 2 EF 03 06 00 02 F7 01 00 B1 20 04 00 VIDEO OFF BE EF 03 06 00 32 B4 01 00 B1 20 FF 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 F1 F5 02 00 B1 20 00 00 COMPUTER1 BE EF 03 06 00 7A F4 01 00 B3 20 00 00 MON
32. 03 06 00 96 01 00 01 36 11 00 MY MEMORY BE EF 03 06 00 66 3E 01 00 01 36 12 00 ACTIVE IRIS BE EF 03 06 00 56 3C 01 00 01 36 15 00 PICTURE MODE BE EF 03 06 00 F6 01 00 01 36 13 00 FILTER RESET BE EF 03 06 00 C6 3D 01 00 01 36 14 00 AV MUTE BE EF 03 06 00 56 39 01 00 01 36 19 00 TEMPLATE BE EF 03 06 00 36 38 01 00 01 36 1B 00 RESOLUTION BE EF 03 06 00 66 3B 01 00 01 36 1E 00 MIC VOLUME BE EF 03 06 00 66 25 01 00 01 36 36 00 ECO MODE BE EF 03 06 00 F6 24 01 00 01 36 37 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 F5 32 02 00 01 36 00 00 continued on next page ViewSonic 217 Pro9500 Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code COMPUTER 06 00 38 00 2036 00 00 COMPUTERIN2 BE EF 03 06 00 01 00 2036 04 00 LAN BE EF 03 06 00 CA3F 01 00 2036 0B 00 USBTYPEA EF 06 00 5A 01 2036 06 00 Set USBTYPEB 06 00 3D 2036 00 MY SOURCE HDMI 03 06 00 0A 38 01 00 20 36 0300 COMPONENT BE 03 06 00 01 00 20 36 05 00 S VIDEO 06 00 9A 39 01 00 2036 0200 VIDEO 0
33. 04 00 03 20 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 3E D3 05 00 03 20 00 00 BRIGHTNESS Execute BE EF 03 06 00 58 D3 06 00 00 70 00 00 Reset continued on next page ViewSonic 205 Pro9500 Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code Get 03 06 00 FD D3 02 00 0420 00 00 CONTRAST Increment EF 06 04 00 0420 00 00 Decrement BE EF 06 00 4A D2 05 00 0420 00 00 Execute BE EF 03 06 00 4 02 06 00 01 70 00 00 1 06 00 07 E9 0100 A130 20 00 1 CUSTOM EF 06 00 07 FD 0100 A130 10 00 2DEFAULT EF 06 00 97 EB 0100 A1 30 21 00 2 CUSTOM EF 03 06 00 97 01 00 A1 30 1100 3DEFAULT 06 00 67 EB 0100 A1 30 22 00 3 CUSTOM EF 06 00 67 FC 0100 A130 12 00 Set DEFAULT 03 06 00 F7 E9 01 00 A1 30 23 00 4 CUSTOM EF 06 00 F7 FD 0100 A130 13 00 5DEFAULT 06 00 C7 01 00 A1 30 24 00 5 CUSTOM 06 00 C7 0100 A130 14 00 6DEFAULT 03 06 00 57 01 00 A1 30 25 00 6 CU
34. 04 00 44 21 00 00 Distortion Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 4A 96 05 00 44 21 00 00 PERFECT FIT Get BE EF 03 06 00 01 96 02 00 45 21 00 00 Bottom Side Increment BE EF 03 06 00 67 96 04 00 45 21 00 00 Distortion Decrement EF 03 06 00 B6 97 05 00 45 21 00 00 PERFECT FIT Get BE EF 03 06 00 45 96 02 00 46 21 00 00 Distortion Increment BE EF 03 06 00 23 96 04 00 46 21 00 00 Position H Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 F2 97 05 00 46 21 00 00 PERFECT FIT Execute BE EF 03 06 00 3D 96 06 00 47 21 00 00 All Sides Reset OFF BE EF 03 06 00 FB 27 01 00 10 33 00 00 E 96 EF 03 06 00 6B 26 01 00 10 33 01 00 Get 03 06 00 C827 02 00 10 33 00 00 Set NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 23 01 00 00 33 00 00 ECO MODE 5 03 06 00 22 01 00 00 33 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 08 23 02 00 00 33 00 00 continued on next page ViewSonic 211 Pro9500 Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 C7 02 01 00 01 30 00 00 Set H INVERT BE EF 03 06 00 57 D3 01 00 01 30 01 00 MIRROR V INVERT BE EF 03 06 00 A7 D3 01 00 01 30 02 00 H amp V INVERT BE EF 03 06 00 37 D2
35. 2 2 Starting the Network Presentation continued 2 Multi PC mode The projector screen is divided to 4 zones The projector displays images in one zone sent by a computer so that the projector can display images sent by up to 4 computers at the same time 2 2 2 Presenter mode In the Single PC mode the projector can be occupied by one computer and can block an access from any other computer if the Presenter mode is selected in the LiveViewer While making your presentation you don t need to worry that the image on screen is unexpectedly switched to an image sent by another computer The Presenter mode can be set on the Option menu in the LiveViewer main menu 2 2 3 Display User Name A User be input in the LiveViewer which is displayed on screen by operating the menu on the projector So it can be found out whose image is currently displayed on screen ViewSonic 148 Pro9500 3 Web Control You can adjust or control the projector via a network from a web browser on a computer that is connected to the same network NOTE Internet Explorer 6 0 or later is required f JavaScript is disabled in your web browser configuration you must enable JavaScript in order to use the projector web pages properly See the Help files for your web browser for details on how to enable JavaScript lt is recommended that all web browser updates are installed View
36. COMPUTER IN1 port 19 Security slot 4 USB TYPEA DC5V 0 5A M c MONITOR OUT 1 3 19 continued on next ViewSonic 8 Pro9500 Part names continued Remote control 1 VIDEO button 2 COMPUTER button 3 SEARCH button 4 STANDBY ON button 5 ASPECT button 6 AUTO button 7 BLANK button 8 MAGNIFY ON button 9 MAGNIFY OFF button 10 MY SOURCE DOC CAMERA button 11 VOLUME button 12 PAGE UP button 13 PAGE DOWN button 14 VOLUME button 15 MUTE button 16 FREEZE button 17 MY BUTTON 1 button 18 MY BUTTON 2 button 19 KEYSTONE button 20 POSITION button 21 MENU button 22 A Y lt p cursor buttons 23 ENTER button 24 ESC button 25 RESET button 26 Battery cover aw Sw aS Se aS Se a ViewSonic 9 20 5 18 22 ETT 23 24 19 25 26 the remote control Pro9500 Uo Install the projector according to the environment and manner the projector will be used in Li For the case of installation in a special state such as ceiling mount the specified mounting accessories and service may be required Before installing the projector consult your
37. Display MOG 2 rcnt s troie rete eee akawa aaa RP ds 147 2 2 1 ModE TEL 148 2 9 Displ y UserName 148 ViewSonic 4 Pro9500 Web Control M 149 S Noo 150 3 2 Network INPORMATION ies nete chia an dean 152 93 9 Network Settings 153 3 4 Port Settings corio oer e en a e RR E e a 154 3 9 Mall Settings tete rete Ere raperet tation ds states EEEN Ode ela te 156 3 6 Alert Settings cene ntn es nrbe nl RR raa eR RR RR ak 157 3 7 Schedule Settings sse eem 158 3 8 Date Time Settings u u U uu uu 162 3 9 Security Settings eene 164 3 10 Projector Control 165 3 11 Remote 171 3 12 Projector Status 172 3 13 NETWOrK 173 4 My Image Function 174 5 Messeger Function ecrit 176 6 Network Bridge Function 1 1 178 6 1 Connecting devices 178 6 2 Communication 5 179 6 3 Communication 179 6 4 Transmission method 180
38. EF 06 00 2C 06 00 57 70 00 00 Point 8 Reset 1 HIGH EF 06 00 F5 01 00 BO 00 1CUSTOM 06 CB F8 BO 13 00 2 MID EF 06 00 9B F4 0100 BO 30 02 00 2CUSTOM 06 00 5B 0100 12 00 3LOW EF 06 00 6B 0100 BO 0100 se 3CUSTOM EF 06 00 AB FO 00 1100 COLOR TEMP 4nuiBRIGHTA EF 03 06 00 F2 0100 BO 30 08 00 4CUSTOM 06 00 FF 0100 BO 30 18 00 5 2 BE EF 06 00 01 00 BO 30 09 00 5CUSTOM 03 06 00 6B 01 00 Bo 19 00 6HiBRIGHT 3 BE EF 06 00 BB 00 BO 30 OA 00 6CUSTOM 03 0600 9B 0100 BO 00 Get EF 06 00 C8 F5 02 00 BO 30 00 00 Get EF 06 00 34 F4 02 00 B1 30 00 00 k Increment EF 03 06 00 52 F4 04 00 B1 30 00 00 Decrement EF 03 06 00 83 5 0500 B1 30 00 00 COLOR TEMP GAIN P ass Execute EF 06 00 10 ce 06 oo 46 70 00 00 Get EF 06 00 70 F4 02 00 B2 30 00 00 2 Increment EF 06 00 16 F4 0400 B2 30 00 00 Decrement EF 06 00 C7 F5 0500 B2 30 00 00 COLOR TEMP Execute EF 03 06
39. HALF DUPLEX FULL DUPLEX 6 4 1 HALF DUPLEX This method lets the projector make two way communication but only one direction either transmitting or receiving data is allowed at a time The method does not allow the projector to receive the data from the computer while waiting for response data from an external device After the projector receives the response data from an external device or the response limit time is past the projector can receive the data from the computer That means that the projector controls transmitting and receiving the data to synchronize the communication To use the HALF DUPLEX method set up the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME following the instructions below TCP IP data Protocol change Serial data gt Ethernet RS 232C LAN cable RS 232C cable Computer External device Response limit Discarding data time Response data Using the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME menu set the waiting time response data from an external device OPTION menu SERVICE COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide OFF 1 25 3 OFF ViewSonic 180 Pro9500 6 4 Transmission method Continued NOTE With using the HALF DUPLEX method the projector can send out 254 byte data as maximum at once If it is not required to monitor the response data from an external device and the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME is set to OFF the projector can receive the dat
40. If you are using Simple Stack it is recommended to disable the remote control receiving on Set B using KEY LOCK and operate using the control panel or a wired remote control as Set A will respond to the remote control Operating Guide OPTION menu If you are using Simple Stack go to For Simple Stack users 4 Display the menu with the MENU button Operating Guide Using the menu function 5 Use the A W lt gt buttons to go into the following menu ADVANCED MENU gt OPTION SERVICE _ COMMUNICATION STACK gt SERVICE gt COMMUNICATION STACK WOD ca STACK ALTERNATE MODE NORMAL SUB INPUT SOURCE FOLLOW MAIN UNIT STACK menu will appear on screen erating Guide OPTION menu continued on next page ViewSonic 232 Pro9500 Installation 2 3 Installing the second projector Set B Setting up Set B continued 6 Use the A Y buttons to highlight STACK OFF MODE and press the button to display the STACK MODE dialog Highlight MAIN with the A Y buttons and press the 4 button to return to the previous menu 7 Use the A Y buttons to highlight LAMP COM MODE and press the button to display ALTERNATE the LAMP MODE dialog osea Highlight DUAL with the buttons and press the button 8 After pressing the button a dialog to confirm whether or not to save the setting is YOU WISH CHANGE STACK SETTING displayed 0 YE
41. Refers to Cover error one of 0 to 2 ERST Error Status inquiry 5th byte Refers to Filter error one of 0 to 2 6th byte Refers to Other error one of 0 to 2 The mearning of 0 to 2 is as given below 0 Error is not detected 1 Warning 2 Error 1st ber digits 1 to 5 L Ti LAMP Lamp Status inquiry Senne iiis Lie Eat pc Ts 2nd number 0 Lamp off 1 Lamp on INST Input Source List inquiry 11 12 21 22 23 31 41 51 52 NAME Projector Name inquiry m M INF1 Manufucturer s ViewSonic inquiry INF2 Model Name inquiry Your model name Pro9500 INFO Other Information inquiry XGA Projector CLSS Class Information inquiry 1 NOTE The password used in PJLink is the same as the password set in the Web Brouwser Comtrol To use PJLink without authentication do not set any password in Web Browser Control For specifications of PULink see the web site of the Japan Business Machine and Information System Industries Association URL http pjlink jbmia or jp ViewSonic 220 Pro9500 Projector Pro9500 Instant Stack Guide Thank you for purchasing this product This manual is intended to explain only Instant Stack feature Other than what is mentioned in this manual please see other manuals of this product Features This projector can be used with another projector of the same type to project an image on the same screen using the Instant Stack feature The two projectors
42. Setting up Set B 1 Turn on Set B NOTE After turning on Set B make sure the image of Set B is not significantly tilted compared to the image of Set A If the image is overly tilted rotate the elevator feet of Set B to adjust the angle such that the tilt is just about right Check again that there is a gap of about 1 mm between the protrusion at the bottom of Set B and the top of Set A 2 Reset the adjustment of KEYSTONE and PERFECT FIT on Set B Operat ing Guide EASY MENU or SETUP menu NOTE KEYSTONE cannot be operated when PERFECT FIT is in use To reset both functions reset PERFECT FIT first Perform the MIRROR setting first if necessary as it may change the image position Operating Guide SETUP menu 3 Adjust the image size and position of Set B with the ZOOM ring VERTICAL adjuster HORIZONTAL adjuster and FOCUS ring such that the image can be superimposed well to the image of Set A NOTE Fine adjustment of the image size and position thereafter with functions such as KEYSTONE and PERFECT FIT does not increase the image size It is therefore important to have the image of Set B completely overlapping the image of Set A When controlling Set B with the remote control Set A may also respond to the remote control It is recommended to control Set B with the control panel on Set B When two projectors are arranged side by side adjust the image of Set B to superimpose well to the image of Set A
43. The language used on the Web Control screen is the same as that of the OSD on the projector If you want to change it you need to change the OSD language on the projector SCREEN menu in the Operating Guide ViewSonic 150 Pro9500 3 1 Logon Continued Below are the factory default settings for user name and password User name Password Administrator blank If you logon successfully the screen below will be displayed Main menu Network Information CEE Projector 1 xv CE 192 168 1 10 5o 3 Click the desired operation or configuration item on the main menu ViewSonic 151 Pro9500 3 2 Network Information Displays the projector s current network configuration settings Item Description Projector Name Displays the projector name settings DHCP Displays the DHCP configuration settings IP Address Displays the current IP address Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask Default Gateway Displays the default gateway DNS Server Address Displays the DNS server address MAC Address Displays the ethernet MAC address ViewSonic 152 Pro9500 3 3 Network Settings Displays and configures network settings Item Description IP Configuration Configures network settings DHCP ON Enables DHCP DHCP OFF Disables DHCP IP Address Configures the IP address when DHCP is disabled Subnet Mask Configures the
44. buttons to go into the following menu ADVANCED MENU gt SECURITY gt STACK LOCK amp STACK LOCK STACK LOCK dialog will appear on screen Operating Guide gt SECURITY menu RETURN CERT 2 Use the A Y buttons to highlight OFF and press the button to complete the setting ViewSonic 227 Pro9500 Installation 2 2 Installing the first projector Set A Removing pocket caps When stacking the two projectors remove the pocket caps on Set A Pocket caps NOTE Cap storage pockets for the pocket caps are inside the lens adjuster door Be sure to keep the caps in the storage pockets after removing the caps from the stack pockets To store the cap to the pocket place the thin end of the cap into the pocket first then push the other side of the cap down firmly to the bottom of the pocket It is important to ensure that the caps are securely stored to prevent children and pets from swallowing them Preparing elevator feet When stacking the two projectors set the length of the elevator feet to the minimum using the elevator but tons on Set A and B Deciding installation position Decide the position of Set A and its projection angle User s Manual concise gt Arrangement and Adjusting the projector s elevator NOTE Set the tilt angle of Set A to within 12 degrees from the level line Take the followings into account when considering the installation position VERTICAL adjuster should be
45. consulte los acuerdos de licencia de cada software en las siguientes p ginas y los acuerdos de licencia de cada software en la p gina Web Como los siguientes acuerdos de licencia han sido establecidos por un tercero diferente a nosotros se indican en su original en ingl s Como la licencia del programa el m dulo de software se concede gratuitamente el programa se ofrece sin garant as de ning n tipo bien expresas o impl citas en la medida permitida por la ley aplicable Y no aceptamos ninguna responsabilidad ni compensamos por p rdidas de ning n tipo incluido a t tulo de ejemplo p rdida de datos p rdida de precisi n o p rdida de compatibilidad con interfaz entre otros programas por parte del software en cuesti n y o la utilizaci n del software en la medida permitida por la ley aplicable ViewSonic 261 Pro9500 ESP NOL Accordo di licenza dell utente finale per il software del proiettore II software del proiettore costituito da diversi moduli software indipendenti su ognuno dei quali sussiste il nostro copyright e o i copyright di terzi Inoltre il proiettore utilizza moduli software sviluppati e o prodotti da noi Il nostro copyright e la nostra propriet intellettuale si applicano a ciascuno di questi software e ai prodotti annessi compresi ma non limitati ai documenti relativi ai software diritti di cui sopra sono tutelati dalla legge sul copyright e dalle altre leggi applicabili Il proiettore ut
46. nder programvarumoduler som r licensierade som gratisprogram enligt GNU General Public License Version 2 och GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 utvecklade av Free Software Foundation Inc USA eller licensavtal f r varje programvara Se f ljande webbsida f r licensavtal f r s dana programvarumoduler och andra programvaror Webbsida http www viewsonic com products pro9500 htm Kontakta din terf rs ljare f r fr gor ang ende licensierad programvara Se licensavtal f r varje programvara p f ljande sidor och licensavtal f r varje programvara p webbsidan f r detaljer om licensvillkor och s vidare Eftersom f ljande licensavtal uppr ttats av en tredje part och inte av oss r originaltexten p engelska Eftersom programmet programvarumodulen r licensierad som gratisprogram levereras programmet i befintligt skick utan n gon typ av garanti vare sig uttryckt eller underf rst dd till den omfattning som r till tet enligt till mplig lag Vi tar oss inget ansvar eller kompensation f r f rlust av n got slag inklusive men inte begr nsat till f rlust av data exakthet eller kompabilitet med gr nssnitt mellan andra program f r den programvara som avses och eller bruk av den programvara som avses till den omfattning som r till tet enligt till mplig lag ViewSonic 268 Pro9500 SVEN SKA
47. other matter the internal temperature will rise which could cause malfunction or reduce the lifetime of the projector Please be careful with the operating environment of the projector and the condition of the filter unit continued on next page ViewSonic 62 Pro9500 Description SERVICE continued KEY LOCK 1 Use the buttons to choose the operations control CONTROL PANEL lt gt REMOTE CONTROL 2 Use the lt gt buttons to select ON or OFF CONTROL PANEL ON gt OFF REMOTE CONTROL Selecting ON in Step 2 locks the buttons except STANDBY ON on the operations control selected in Step 1 Selecting OFF releases the locked buttons on the operations control selected in Step 1 Please use this function to prevent tampering or accidental operation REMOTE FREQ 1 Use the button to change the projector s remote sensor frequency setting 1 NORMAL 2 HIGH 2 Use the lt gt button to change the projector s remote sensor on or off ON lt gt OFF The factory default setting is for both 1 NORMAL and 2 HIGH to be on If the remote control does not function correctly disable either of them It s not possible to disable both options at the same time Selecting this item displays COMMUNICATION menu In this menu you can configure the serial communication settings of the projector using the CONTROL port OPTION SERVICE COMMUNICATION 1 NORMAL 2 HIGH
48. please select the Sunday Click the Enable check box to enable scheduling Enter the date month day for specific date scheduling Click the Apply button to save the settings After configure the time command and parameters click the Register to add the new event 8 Click the Delete button when you want to delete a schedule 4 5 6 7 There are three types of scheduling 1 Daily Perform the specified operation at a specified time every day 2 Sunday Saturday Perform the specified operation at the specified time on a specified day of the week 3 Specific date Perform the specified operation on the specified date and time NOTE standby mode the POWER indicator will flash green for approx 3 seconds when at least 1 Power ON schedule is saved When the schedule function is used the power cord must be connected to the projector and the outlet The schedule function does not work when the breaker in a room is tripped The power indicator will lights orange or green when the projector is receiving AC power ViewSonic 186 Pro9500 7 3 Event Scheduling Continued Date Time Settings The Date Time setting can be adjusted via a web browser Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Date Time Settings on the main men
49. www viewsonic com la soporte index htm N MERO GRATIS DE ASISTENCIA T CNICA PARA TODO M XICO 001 866 823 2004 Hermosillo Distribuciones y Servicios Computacionales SA de CV Calle Juarez 284 local 2 Col Bugambilias C P 83140 Tel 01 66 22 14 9005 E Mail disc2 hmo megared net mx Puebla Pue Matriz RENTA Y DATOS S A DE C V Domicilio 29 SUR 721 COL LA PAZ 72160 PUEBLA PUE Tel 01 52 222 891 55 77 CON 10 LINEAS E Mail datos puebla megared net mx Chihuahua Soluciones Globales en Computaci n C Magisterio 3321 Col Magisterial Chihuahua Chih Tel 4136954 E Mail Cefeo soluglobales com Distrito Federal QPLUS S A de C V Av Coyoac n 931 Col Del Valle 03100 M xico D F Tel 01 52 55 50 00 27 35 E Mail gacosta qplus com mx Guerrero Acapulco GS Computaci n Grupo Sesicomp Progreso 6 A Colo Centro 39300 Acapulco Guerrero Tel 744 48 32627 MERIDA ELECTROSER Reforma No 403Gx39 41 M rida Yucat n M xico CP97000 Tel 52 999 925 1916 E Mail rrrb sureste com Av Ferrocarril Sonora 3780 L C Col 20 de Noviembre Tijuana Mexico 4 3 ViewSonic Mexico Limited Warranty ViewSonic Villahermosa Compumantenimietnos Garantizados S A de C V AV GREGORIO MENDEZ 1504 COL FLORIDA C P 86040 Tel 01 993 3 52 00 47 3522074 3 52 20 09 E Mail compumantenimientos prodigy net mx Veracruz Ver CONEXION Y DESARROLLO S A DE Av Americas 41
50. www viewsonic com products pro9500 htm Adressez vous votre revendeur pour toute question sur les logiciels sous licence Consultez les accords de licence de chaque logiciel aux pages suivantes et les accords de licence de chaque logiciel sur la page Web pour le d tail des conditions de licence etc tant donn que les accords de licence suivants sont tablis par un tiers autre que nous ils sont stipul s en anglais tant donn que le programme le module logiciel est accord sous licence gratuitement le programme est fourni sans aucune garantie explicite ou implicite dans la mesure permise par la loi Et nous n assumons aucune responsabilit ni ne compensons pour la perte de toute sorte y compris mais sans s y limiter les pertes de donn es la perte de pr cision ou la perte de compatibilit avec une interface entre d autres programmes par le logiciel concern et ou l utilisation du logiciel concern dans la mesure permise par la loi ViewSonic 259 Pro9500 Endbenutzerlizenzvereinbarung f r die Projektorsoftware Die Projektorsoftware besteht aus einer Vielzahl unabh ngiger Softwaremodule und jedes dieser Softwaremodule unterliegt dem Urheberrecht von uns und oder dem Urheberrecht Dritter Der Projektor verwendet zudem durch uns entwickelte und oder produzierte Softwaremodule F r jedes dieser Softwaremodule sowie deren Zubeh r einschlie lich aber nicht beschr nkt auf die zur Software geh rigen Dokumente u
51. 00 EC 06 oo 47 70 00 00 Get EF 06 00 8C F5 02 00 30 00 00 MET Increment EF 03 06 00 EA F5 04 00 B3 30 00 00 Decrement EF 06 00 F4 05 00 30 00 00 COLOR TEMP CAIN B Rese Execute BE EF 06 00 F8 c4 06 oo 48 70 00 00 Get EF 06 00 04 F5 02 00 B5 30 00 00 Increment EF 03 06 00 62 F5 04 00 B5 30 00 00 Decrement EF 06 00 B3 F4 0500 B5 30 00 00 COLOR TEMP OFFSET Execute EF 06 00 40 C5 06 oo 4A 70 0000 Reset continued on next page ViewSonic 207 Pro9500 Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code Get EF 03 06 00 40 F5 02 00 B6 30 00 00 Increment BE EF 03 06 00 26 F5 04 00 B6 30 00 00 Decrement EF 03 06 00 F7 FA 05 00 B6 00 00 COLOR TEMP OFFSET G Execute EF 03 06 00 BC C4 06 00 4B 70 00 00 Reset Get EF 03 06 00 BC F4 02 00 B7 30 00 00 Increment EF 03 06 00 DA F4 04 00 B7 30 00 00 Decrement EF 03 06 00 F5 05 00 B7 30 00 00 COLOR TEMP OFFSET B Execute EF 03 06 00 C8 C5 06 00 4C 70 00 00 Reset Get EF 03 06 00 5 72 0200
52. 00 16 9 EF 03 06 00 D1 01 00 0820 01 00 Set 16 10 EF 03 06 00 06 01 00 08 20 0A 00 14 9 BE EF 03 06 00 06 01 00 08 20 09 00 NORMAL EF 03 06 00 DD 01 00 08 20 10 00 Get EF 03 06 00 AD DO 02 00 08 20 00 00 Get EF 03 06 00 91 70 02 00 09 22 00 00 OVER SCAN Increment EF 03 06 00 F7 70 04 00 09 22 00 00 Decrement EF 03 06 00 26 71 05 00 09 22 00 00 continued on next page ViewSonic 208 Pro9500 Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code OVER SCAN Execute BE EF 03 06 00 EC D9 06 00 27 70 00 00 Reset Get BE EF 03 06 00 OD 83 02 00 00 21 00 00 V POSITION Increment BE EF 03 06 00 6B 83 04 00 00 21 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 BA 82 05 00 00 21 00 00 V POSITION Execute BE EF 03 06 00 EO 02 06 00 02 70 00 00 Reset Get BE EF 03 06 00 F1 82 02 00 01 21 00 00 H POSITION Increment BE EF 03 06 00 97 82 04 00 01 21 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 46 83 05 00 01 21 00 00 H POSITION Execute BE EF 03 06 00 1C D3 06 00 03 70 00 00 Reset Get BE EF 03 06 00 49 83 02 00 03 21 00 00 H PHASE Increment BE EF 03 06 00 2F
53. 00 36 10 00 AUTO KEYSTONE V BE EF 03 06 00 6A 3F 01 00 00 36 11 00 MY MEMORY BE EF 03 06 00 9A 01 00 00 36 12 00 ACTIVE IRIS BE EF 03 06 00 AA 3D 01 00 00 36 15 00 PICTURE MODE BE EF 03 06 00 OA 01 00 00 36 13 00 FILTER RESET BE EF 03 06 00 01 00 00 36 14 00 AV MUTE BE EF 03 06 00 AA 38 01 00 00 36 19 00 TEMPLATE BE EF 03 06 00 CA 39 01 00 00 36 1B 00 RESOLUTION BE EF 03 06 00 9A 3A 01 00 00 36 1E 00 MIC VOLUME BE EF 03 06 00 9A 24 01 00 00 36 36 00 ECO MODE BE EF 03 06 00 0A 25 01 00 00 36 37 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 09 33 02 00 00 36 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 C6 32 01 00 01 36 00 00 COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 06 30 01 00 01 36 04 00 LAN BE EF 03 06 00 F6 35 0100 01 36 0 00 USB TYPEA BE EF 03 06 00 66 31 01 00 01 36 06 00 USB B BE EF 03 06 00 C6 37 0100 01 36 0C 00 HDMI BE EF 03 06 00 36 32 0100 01 36 03 00 COMPONENT BE EF 03 06 00 96 31 01 00 01 36 05 00 S VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 A6 33 01 00 01 36 02 00 VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 56 33 01 00 01 36 01 00 SLIDESHOW BE EF 03 06 00 66 2A 0100 01 36 22 00 MY IMAGE BE EF 03 06 00 A6 3C 0100 01 36 16 00 Set MESSENGER BE EF 03 06 00 56 28 0100 01 36 25 00 INFORMATION EF 03 06 00 06 01 00 01 36 10 00 AUTO KEYSTONE V BE EF
54. 02 22 00 00 COLOR Increment EF 03 06 00 D3 72 04 00 02 22 00 00 Decrement EF 03 06 00 02 73 05 00 02 22 00 00 COLOR Reset Execute BE EF 03 06 00 80 DO 06 00 0A 70 00 00 Get EF 03 06 00 49 73 02 00 03 22 00 00 TINT Increment BE EF 03 06 00 2F 73 04 00 03 22 00 00 Decrement EF 03 06 00 FE 72 05 00 03 22 00 00 TINT Reset Execute EF 03 06 00 D1 06 00 70 00 00 Get EF 03 06 00 F1 72 02 00 01 22 00 00 SHARPNESS Increment BE EF 03 06 00 97 72 04 00 01 22 00 00 Decrement EF 03 06 00 46 73 05 00 01 22 00 00 SHARPNESS Execute EF 03 06 00 C4 00 06 00 09 70 00 00 Reset ACTIVE IRIS OFF BE EF 03 06 00 0B 22 01 00 04 33 00 00 Set THEATER BE EF 03 06 00 CB 2F 01 00 04 33 10 00 PRESENTATION BE EF 03 06 00 5B 2E 01 00 04 33 11 00 Get EF 03 06 00 38 22 02 00 04 33 00 00 1 EF 03 06 00 D7 01 00 14 20 00 00 MY MEMORY Set 2 BE EF 03 06 00 9E 06 01 00 14 20 01 00 Load 3 BE EF 03 06 00 6E 06 01 00 14 20 02 00 4 BE EF 03 06 00 FED7 01 00 14 20 03 00 1 BE EF 03 06 00 F2 D6 01 00 15 20 00 00 MY MEMORY Set 2 BE EF 03 06 00 62 D7 01 00 15 20 01 00 Save 3 EF 03 06 00 92 07 01 00 15 20 02 00 4 EF 03 06 00 02 D6 01 00 15 20 03 00 4 3 03 06 00 9E DO 01 00 08 20 00
55. 16 D9 01 00 22 20 01 00 HOMIRANGE ENHANCED BE EF 03 06 00 E6 D9 01 00 22 20 02 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 B5 D8 02 00 22 20 00 00 Set AUTO BE EF 03 06 00 06 01 00 10 20 03 00 COMPUTER IN1 SYNCONGOFF 03 06 00 07 01 00 10 20 02 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 OD 06 02 00 10 20 00 00 sa AUTO EF 03 06 00 32 07 0100 11 20 03 00 COMPUTER IN2 SYNC ON G OFF BE 03 06 00 A2 06 01 00 11 20 02 00 Get EF 03 06 00 1 07 0200 11 20 00 00 OFF EF 03 06 00 2 01 00 50 30 00 00 Set ON EF 03 06 00 C3 01 00 50 30 01 00 Get EF 03 06 00 08 C2 02 00 50 30 00 00 OFF EF 03 06 00 C3 01 00 54 30 00 00 CETERIS Sel ON BE EF 03 06 00 9B C2 01 00 54 30 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 38 C3 02 00 54 30 00 00 OFF BE EF 03 06 00 7F C2 01 00 53 30 00 00 Set ON EF 03 06 00 EF C3 01 00 53 30 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 4C C2 02 00 53 30 00 00 AUTO KEYSTONE V Execute BE EF 03 06 00 E5 D1 06 00 0D 20 00 00 EXECUTE Get EF 03 06 00 9 D3 02 00 07 20 00 00 KEYSTONE V Increment EF 03 06 00 DF D3 04 00 07 20 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 0E D2 05 00 07 20 00 00 KEYSTONE V Execute BE EF 03 06 00 08 D0 06 00 0C 70 00 00 Reset Get BE EF 03 06 00 E9 D0 02 00 0B 20 00 00 KEYSTONE H Inc
56. 2 AIE BAA 212180 ALS aE vest 919 JIE AL E 7 Set Slo er al 1 EA ray 7E SZEMOlS HAS AS CS I ola A i O X FA http www viewsonic com products pro9500 htm AS o7tel EMO dio zat 0 mlo 40 D 2 Ao 10 Ol I gt gt m 29 ZA Sol uer AHAS ug 9 2t Of BOMA S 9 ZF AEE Sol MA ALS SALE A AE AE SESS AIZEA 2 AOl 5719 ey gol BSE OFS BAA E SANA gol Ide E8 HE0 885 SS ool AA aE TE qE zegase AAs lemoa ziz olol S LS 5 9 EE AEE ABL elek 40 stel ViewSonic 267 Pro9500 Slutanvandarlicensavtal for projektorns programvara Programvaran i projektorn bestar av flera olika oberoende programvarumoduler och var upphovsr tt och eller tredje parts upphovsr tter existerar f r var och en av dessa programvarumoduler Projektorn har ven programvarumoduler som har utvecklats och eller skapats V r upphovsr tt och intellektuell egendom existerar f r var och en av s dana programvaror och relaterade f rem l inklusive men inte begr nsat till programvarans relaterade dokument Ovanst ende r ttigheter skyddas av upphovsr ttslag och andra till mpliga lagar Projektorn anv
57. 251 and Sub settings 233 Inputting image from Main to Sub E Video signal 2 5 Fine adjusting either component or video 252 image position 234 Tnm image to For Intellectual Stack users 234 Sub and Main individually 252 For Simple Stack users 235 De 6 Restrictions on Schedule function 254 7 Troubleshooting 256 ViewSonic 222 Pro9500 1 Introduction 1 1 Entries and graphical symbols explanation The following entries and graphical symbols are used for the manuals and the product as follows for safety purpose Please know their meanings beforehand and heed them AWARNING This entry warns of a risk of serious personal injury or even death ACAUTION This entry warns of a risk of personal injury or physical damage NOTICE This entry notices of fear of causing trouble 1 2 Important safety instruction The followings are important instructions for safely using the product in Instant Stack First of all read the following instructions and be sure to always follow them when using Instant Stack of this product Instant Stack feature AWARNING Take a special care not to fall the stacked projectors When stacking two projectors make sure the elevator feet and heel of the upper projector are inserted into the corresponding pockets of the lower projectors When using the Insta
58. 6 0 or higher Y CD ROM drive NOTE The network communication control is disabled while the projector is in standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item is set to SAVING Please connect the network communication to the projector after setting the STANDBY MODE to NORMAL SETUP menu in the Operating Guide You can get the latest version of the LiveViewer and the latest information for this product from our website Depending on the specification of your computer the computer may slow down due to high CPU usage when the LiveViewer is running LiveViewer does not work on Windows Vista that is not updated to Service Pack 1 or later Please install the latest Service Pack on your Windows Vista ViewSonic 108 Pro9500 1 1 System requirements continued NOTE Referring to the manual of your computer or Windows select the following or a smaller display resolution for the computer 1024 x 768 XGA When a resolution larger than the specified resolution is selected the projector will convert and display in the specified resolution and the display speed may become faster If your computer does not support the display resolution specified above a smaller resolution that is the largest among the resolutions that are supported by the computer will be selected Images might not been transmitted caused by OS version or the driver software for Network Adapter on your computers It is highly recommended that OS and the d
59. 768 2 In the RESOLUTION menu select the EE DE 2 wish to display using 4 STANDARD 1360x 768 e buttons 5 STANDARD 1366 x 768 Selecting AUTO will set a resolution EMO x 788 appropriate to the input signal 3 Pressing the gt or ENTER button when selecting a STANDARD resolution will automatically adjust the horizontal and vertical positions clock phase and RESOLUTION STANDARD l horizontal size COMPUTER IN 1 The INPUT INFORMATION dialog will be displayed 4 To set a custom resolution use the buttons to select the CUSTOM and the RESOLUTION CUSTOM box will be displayed Set the horizontal HORZ and vertical VERT resolutions using B RESOLUTION_CUSTOM the A lt P gt buttons VERT This function may not support all SCONCES ES resolutions 5 Move the cursor to OK on screen and press the or ENTER button The message ARE YOU SURE YOU WISH TO CHANGE RESOLUTION appears To save the setting press the gt button The horizontal and vertical positions clock phase and horizontal size will be automatically adjusted The INPUT INFORMATION dialog will be displayed 6 To revert back to the previous resolution without saving changes move the cursor to CANCEL on screen and press the 4 or ENTER button The screen will then return to the RESOLUTION menu displaying the previous resolution For some pictures this function may not work well 45
60. 8 Confirming the connection to your destination continued 1 8 2 Connection error Connectio rojectoi nection Network Connection not established When the connection to the projector could not be established an error message Network Connection not established will come up Click the OK then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed even though the network is not established Click 3 on the main menu to go back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method ViewSonic 136 Pro9500 1 9 Profile data 1 9 1 Outline of Profile data The network setting to connect the projector and computer can be stored as a profile data Once the data is stored all you need to do is to select the data to connect to the network It is recommended when the same network connection is often used 1 9 2 Making Profile data The profile data is made on the Manual Configuration screen Up to 10 profile data can be stored for each network adapter Date created 11 30 2009 3 19 46 PM 11 30 2009 3 19 41 PM Delete My Connection 1 Select the Profile and click the New Projector name IP address Last connected Projector 1 192 168 1 101 11 30 2009 3 23 24 Projector 2 192 168 1 102 11 30 2009 3 22 24 PM Projector 3 192 168 1 103 11 30 2009 3 21 24 Register to profile Configure Network Settings Manually lt Back Connect Exit 2 The Create new profile
61. Connection Error code ID 1 byte ViewSonic 191 Pro9500 7 4 Command Control the Network Continued Automatic Connection Break The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no communication for 30 seconds after being established Authentication The projector does not accept commands without authentication success when authentication is enabled The projector uses a challenge response type authentication with an MD5 Message Digest 5 algorithm When the projector is using a LAN a random 8 bytes will be returned if authentication is enabled Bind this received 8 bytes and the Authentication Password and digest this data with the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the commands to send Following is a sample if the Authentication Password is set to password and the random 8 bytes are 572160 1 Connect the projector 2 Receive the random 8 bytes 572160 from the projector 3 Bind the random 8 bytes 572160 and the Authentication Password password and it becomes a572f60cpassword 4 Digest this bind a572f60cpassword with MD5 algorithm It will be e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde 5 Add this e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde in front of the commands and send the data Send e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde command 6 When the sending data is correct the command will be performed and the reply data will be returned Otherwise
62. Intellectual Stack and Simple Stack 226 Dialog from STACK menu 243 Remote control for Intellectual Stack 3 7 Important information and Simple Stack 226 for Intellectual Stack 244 Installation styles 226 Tentative terms for the two projectors226 4 Connecting cables 247 2 Installation 227 ind 2 1 Preparing for Intellectual Stack 227 Connecung s gna Inputting image from Main to Sub 248 2 2 Installing listas the fi jector Set nputung image PS projactor ee eee to Sub and Main individually 248 Removing pocket caps 228 Preparing elevator feet 228 5 Setting input ports Deciding installation position 228 USING 249 Setting up Set 229 5 1 Preparing for menu operations 249 2 3 Installing 5 2 Checking Main projector s the second projector Set B 231 operating 249 Stacking the projectors 231 5 3 Starting up Main projector 250 Connecting projectors 231 5 4 Setting the menu 251 Setting up Set 232 Inputting image from Main to Sub 2 4 Confirming Main Computer signal
63. KEYSTONE button or pointed at the EXIT in the dialog with A Y buttons and press the gt or ENTER button MANUAL 8s KEYSTONE MANUAL e 2 When MANUAL is pointed at pressing the gt or ENTER button displays the KEYSTONE MANUAL dialog 3 Select the vertical or horizontal keystone Q with the A F buttons 4 Use the lt gt buttons to adjust the keystone distortion 9 To close the operation press the KEYSTONE button or pointed at the EXIT in the dialog with A Y buttons and press the or ENTER button Alternatively point at RETURN in the dialog with the buttons and press the lt or ENTER button to return to the menu in step 1 ViewSonic 28 Pro9500 PERFECT FIT Zy KEYSTONE _PERFECT FIT 2 When PERFECT FIT is pointed at pressing the gt or ENTER button displays the KEYSTONE PERFECT FIT dialog 3 If itis necessary to initialize the current adjustment point at RESET in the dialog with the RESET button and press the ENTER or INPUT button 4 Select one of the corners or sides to be adjusted with the A Y lt 4 p buttons and press the ENTER or INPUT button 5 Adjust the selected part as below ENTER 5 RETURN e For adjusting a corner use the A Y lt 4 p buttons to adjust the position of the corner e For adjusting the upper or lower side use the lt gt buttons to select one point on the side and use the A Y buttons to adjust the distortion of the side e For adjusting
64. LOCK fully clockwise to tighten it and lock the horizontal lens position Use the FOCUS ring to focus the picture 23 5 NOTE Use a hexagon wrench to turn the VERTICAL HORIZONTAL adjusters and LOCK If you do not have a hexagon wrench you can use a flathead screwdriver with more careful handling Use the LOCK so that the lens does not shift from the adjusted horizontal lens position Adjusting the vertical lens position may shift the horizontal lens position This projector is not equipped with a lock for vertical lens position ViewSonic 26 Pro9500 Using the automatic adjustment feature Pressing this button performs the following AUTO button Press AUTO button on the remote control O For a computer signal The vertical position the horizontal position and the horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size prior to attempting to use this feature A dark picture may still be incorrectly adjusted Use a bright picture when adjusting O For a video signal and s video signal The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be selected automatically This function is available only when the AUTO is selected for the VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT menu The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default O For a component video signal The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set
65. MIC VOLUME ViewSonic Using the A Y buttons switches the mode for the HDMI audio Check each of the two modes provided and select the suitable one for your audio device 182 Using the A Y buttons switches the input level to match that of the microphone connected to the MIC port HIGH gt LOW HIGH for a microphone with an amplifier LOW for a microphone without an amplifier Using the lt P gt buttons adjusts the volume of the microphone connected to the MIC port Low lt gt High 50 Pro9500 SENN From the SCREEN menu items shown in the table ADVANCE ee PICTURE LANGUAGE ENGLISH below can be performed IMAGE MENU POSITION INPUT 5 BLANK BLACK Select an item using the A V cursor buttons and x Eurus ORIGINAL press the cursor button or ENTER button to PIS execute the item Then perform it according to the vsum NN S 8 EASY MENU ic following table EXIT COMPUTER IN 1 1024 768 860Hz Description Using the A lt P buttons switches the OSD On Screen Display language LANGUAGE ENGLISH lt gt FRANCAIS lt DEUTSCH ESPANOL shown in the LANGUAGE dialog Press the ENTER or INPUT button to save the language setting Using the A lt P buttons adjusts the menu position MENU POSITION To quit the operation press the MENU button on the remote control or keep no operation for about 10 seconds Using the A V buttons switches t
66. PASSWORD setting will be recorded The ENTER NEW 000 gt PASSWORD box small will be displayed ENTER NEW PASSWORD 1 3 Use the 4 gt buttons to enter box small password Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box small and press the button to display the NEW 8 TRANSITION DETECTOR PASSWORD AGAIN box enter the same CERES ORO password again oe 1 4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press S the gt button to display the NOTE NEW un PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds please make note of the password during this time Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or the button on the projector will return to the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu Please do not forget your TRANSITION DETECTOR password This function will activate only when the projector is started after turning off the AC power This feature may not function properly if the projector is not in a stable position when ON is selected 2 Turning off the TRANSITION DETECTOR 2 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu 2 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large Enter the registered password and the screen will return to the TIN TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu BENED _ AES 0000 OK gt If an incorrect password is input the menu will close If necessary repeat the process from 2 1 ENTER PASSWORD box
67. Public License version 2 hence the version number 2 1 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case based on the explanations below When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom of use not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive Source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For exam
68. SERIAL SETTINGS TRANSMISSION METHOD HALF DUPLEX RESPONSE LIMIT TIME OFF STACK S RETURN COMMUNICATION Select an item using the cursor buttons Then pressing the gt button opens the submenu for the setting item you selected Or pressing the 4 button instead of the gt button makes the menu back to the previous one without changing the setup Each submenu can be operated as described above When COMMUNICATION TYPE is set to OFF the other items in COMMUNICATION menu are invalid For the function of serial communication refer to the Network Guide continued on next page ViewSonic 63 Pro9500 Item Description SERVICE COMMUNICATION continued continued continued on next page ViewSonic COMMUNICATION TYPE Select the communication type for transmission via the CONTROL port NETWORK BRIDGE lt gt OFF NETWORK BRIDGE Select this type if it is required to control an external device as a network terminal via this projector from the computer The CONTROL port doesn t accept RS 232C commands 6 Network Bridge Function in the Network Guide OFF Select this mode to receive RS 232C commands using the CONTROL port OFF is selected as the default setting When you select the NETWORK BRIDGE check the item TRANSMISSTION METHOD SERIAL SETTINGS Select the serial communication condition for the CONTROL port BAUD RATE 4800bps lt gt 9600bps lt gt 19200bps lt 38
69. SUB is displayed the Main projector is turned off and the Sub projector is operating Go to 5 3 Starting up Main projector ViewSonic 249 Pro9500 Setting input ports using menu 5 3 Starting up Main projector After performing section 5 2 Checking Main projector s operating status the two projectors are confirmed to have been set to ALTERNATE mode and the Sub projector is currently operating As the settings for Intellectual Stack can be changed only when the Main projector is operating this section explains how to switch from the Sub projector to the Main projector 1 Use the A lt P buttons to go into the following menu ADVANCED MENU gt OPTION SERVICE _ COMMUNICATION STACK gt SERVICE gt COMMUNICATION gt STACK LA MODE DUA STACK menu will appear on screen Oper w ating Guide OPTION menu 2 Check the ALTERNATE MODE setting in the menu If NORMAL is displayed the two projectors are turned on alternately Therefore the Main projector will be turned on if you restart the projectors 1 Press the STANDBY ON button on the remote control or control panel of the Main projector the Sub projector will turn off 2 After the projector has cooled down press the STANDBY ON button to turn on again The Main projector will be turned on If AUTO is displayed the projector with the least lamp usage is turned on Therefore the Main projector may not be turned on even if you restart the projectors Fol
70. Set the same message content for the Messenger function Network Guide Messenger Function on the Main and Sub projectors When DUAL is selected for LAMP MODE image shift can result in image quality degradation on the screen Perform the MIRROR setting before adjusting the image position as the image position will change when the MIRROR setting is changed Operating Guide SETUP menu When ALTERNATE is selected and an error occur on the projector in operation causing the lamp to turn off the other projector will automatically start to operate However if the RS 232C cable is disconnected or AC power is not supplied the other projector will not turn on cases when PIN LOCK or TRANSITION DETECTOR on both projectors is set to ON Operating Guide SECURITY menu the two projectors will not turn on even if ALTERNATE is selected Enter the security code on both projectors and one of the projectors will turn on When Intellectual Stack is in use the POWER indicator on the control panel of the projector operates differently than normal Operating Guide Troubleshooting When the Main and Sub projectors are in standby mode the Main projector determines which projector to turn on according to the STACK MODE setting if the STANDBY ON button on the remote control or control panel of the Main projector is pressed The POWER indicator on the Main projector blinks in green while the Main projector determines which proje
71. Stack without RS 232C connection skip this chapter f you do not need to change the settings made during the installation explained prior to this chapter go to 3 3 Selecting lamp operation mode Read 3 7 Important information for Intellectual Stack carefully 3 1 Displaying STACK menu Use the A lt gt buttons to go into the following menu ADVANCED MENU gt OPTION SERVICE _ COMMUNICATION STACK gt SERVICE gt COMMUNICATION gt STACK OFF STACK menu will appear on screen Operat 78 ing Guide OPTION menu The setting for Intellectual Stack operation starts from this menu NOTE Check that the following settings are made on both projectors Otherwise STACK menu on the projectors cannot be operated STANDBY MODE in SETUP menu NORMAL Operating Guide SETUP menu COMMUNICATION TYPE under COMMUNICATION in SERVICE menu OFF Operating Guide OPTION menu STACK LOCK in SECURITY menu OFF ViewSonic 237 Pro9500 STACK menu settings 3 2 Selecting Main Sub or off To enable Intellectual Stack select either MAIN or SUB Intellectual Stack starts when one projector is set to MAIN and the other is set to SUB in the STACK MODE dialog To disable Intellectual Stack select OFF 1 Highlight STACK MODE in the STACK menu with SEES OFF the buttons then press the button to m display the STACK MODE dialog URETURN 2 Use the A Y buttons in the dialog t
72. Sub Only the Main projector is capable of receiving the remote control signals To op erate the Sub projector you need to point the remote control at the Main projector For Simple Stack both projectors can receive the remote control signals To avoid crosstalk when operating with the remote control it is recommended to operate one projector with the remote control and the other with the control panel on the projector or a wired remote control In this case disable the remote control receiving on the other projector with the KEY LOCK feature Operating Guide OPTION menu Installation styles Following are two styles to install the projectors Instant Stack supports both styles Style 1 Stack vertically Style 2 Arrange side by side The descriptions in this manual are mainly on Style 1 installation If you wish to install two projectors in Style 2 refer to the descriptions required in this manual Tentative terms for the two projectors For better understanding of the descriptions in this manual the following terms are used when explain ing the vertical stacking installation Set A Projector placed underneath Set B Projector placed on top of Set A Set A ViewSonic 226 Pro9500 2 Installation For safety reasons read 1 2 Important safety instruction carefully before installa tion In addition take note of the followings for proper use of Instant Stack e When using Intellectual Stack both projectors will r
73. TRANSITION DETECTOR is ON Using the A V buttons turns on off the AUTO ECO MODE ON amp OFF When ON is selected the projector will always be set to Eco mode at start up regardless of the ECO MODE setting An OSD message AUTO ECO MODE will be displayed for tens of seconds when the projector starts with this function activated Using the A V buttons turns off on the Eco mode NORMAL amp ECO When the is selected acoustic noise and screen brightness are reduced When AUTO ECO MODE is set to ON the projector will always be set to Eco mode at start up regardless this setting Using the A Y buttons switches the mode for mirror status m 9 LEE s H INVERT lt gt V INVERT lt H amp V Dd If the erum Detector is on and MIRROR 15 TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm will be displayed when projector is restarted after the AC power is turned off continued on next page ViewSonic 47 Pro9500 Description STANDBY MODE MONITOR OUT ViewSonic Using A F buttons switches the standby mode setting between NORMAL and SAVING NORMAL SAVING When SAVING is selected the power consumption in the standby mode is lowered with some functional restriction as below When SAVING is selected the RS 232C communication control except to turn the projector on and the network function are disabled while the projector is in the standby mode If the COMMUNICATION TYPE in the COMMUNICA
74. TYPE menu select the NETWORK BRIDGE for the CONTROL port 2 Using the SERIAL SETTINGS menu select the proper baud rate and parity for the CONTROL port according to the specification of the RS 232C port of the connected device Item Condition BAUD RATE 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps PARITY NONE ODD EVEN Data length 8 bit fixed Start bit 1 bit fixed Stop bit 1 bit fixed 3 Using the TRANSMISSION METHOD menu set up the proper method for the CONTROL port according to your use NOTE OFF is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE as the default setting Using the COMMUNICATION menu set up the communication Remember that an unsuitable setup could cause malfunction of communication When COMMUNICATION TYPE is set to NETWORK BRIDGE the CONTROL port doesn t accept RS 232C commands 6 3 Communication port For the NETWORK BRIDGE function send the data from the computer to the projector with using the Network Bridge Port that is configured in the Port Settings of web browser NOTE Except for 9715 9716 9719 9720 5900 5500 4352 between 1024 and 65535 can be set up as the Network Bridge Port number It is set to 9717 as the default setting ViewSonic 179 Pro9500 6 4 Transmission method The transmission method can be selected from the menus only when the NETWORK BRIDGE is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE OPTION menu SERVICE COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide
75. The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code Your password will be sent after 01 2345 6789 your user registration information is confirmed f there is no key input for about 55 seconds while the Inquiring Code is displayed the menu will close If necessary repeat the process from 1 SECURITY Description 1 Use the A Y buttons on the SECURITY menu to select SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE ENTER NEW PASSWORD and press the button to display the ENTER 0000 gt NEW PASSWORD box 2 Use the A lt gt buttons to enter the new password 3 Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box and press the 1077 SECURITY gt button to display the NEW PASSWORD NEW RASSNORD AGAIN ES SS PASSWORD AGAIN box enter the same password again 23 0 CHANGE 4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW FCUBITYSISSORD PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the gt TEE button and the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box 0000 will be displayed for about 30 seconds please make note of the password during this time Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control button on the projector will close the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box Please do not forget your password continued on next page ViewSonic 74 Pro9500 Description MyScreen PASSWORD The MyScreen PASSWORD function can be used to prohibit access to the MyScreen function and prevent the currently register
76. Troubleshooting continued Reference Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect page The settings on the projectors are not set for the Intellectual Stack feature Check the following settings on the Main and Sub projectors 2 STANDBY MODE SETUP menu 7 function NORMAL COMMUNICATION TYPE under COMMUNICATION in SERVICE menu OFF STACK LOCK in SECURITY menu OFF The remote control is pointed at the Sub projector the Main projector is capable of receiving the remote control signals Therefore point at the Main projector when using the remote control The two images are not superimposed correctly The images are either out of Adjust the ZOOM ring VERTICAL adjuster 2 superimposed B If necessary adjust PERFECT FIT KEYSTONE as well There are some adjustment differences in the two images Try to resolve the problem with the following measures Press the AUTO button on the remote 24 control or execute AUTO ADJUST in Operating EXECUTE on each of the projectors Guide Adjust H POSITION and V POSITION on 38 each of the projectors in Operating Guide Check the RESOLUTION setting in the 42 INPUT menu and change to the same in Operating setting if the setting differs between Main Guide and Sub projectors do not superimposed even after performing fine adjustment ViewSonic 257 Pro9500 End User License Agreement for the Projector Software Software in
77. active iris mode PICTURE MODE Changes the PICTURE MODE FILTER RESET Displays the filter time reset confirmation dialogue TEMPLATE Makes the template pattern selected to the TEMPLATE item appear or disappear AV MUTE Turns the picture and audio on off RESOLUTION Turns on off the RESOLUTION dialog MIC VOLUME Turns on off the MIC VOLUME dialog ECO MODE Turns on off the ECO MODE dialog MY BUTTON Continued Using A F buttons selects the picture input port to be selected with pressing the MY SOURCE DOC CAMERA button on the remote control MY SOURCE You can use this function not only for document cameras but also computers and other equipment IN1 lt gt COMPUTER 2 lt gt LAN USB VIDEO S VIDEO lt gt COMPONENT lt gt lt gt USB continued on next ViewSonic 61 Pro9500 Description SERVICE Selecting this item displays the SERVICE D SERES menu 5 AUTO ADJUST Select an item using the A Y buttons a and press the button or the ENTER M ic button on the remote control to execute INFORMATION the item RETURN FAN SPEED Using the buttons switches the rotation speed of the cooling fans The HIGH is the mode for use at highlands etc If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1200 m or higher select HIGH Otherwise select NORMAL Note that the projector is noisier when the HIGH is selected
78. among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 11 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EX
79. an authentication error will be returned NOTE As for the transmission of the second or subsequent commands the authentication data can be omitted when the same connection ViewSonic 192 Pro9500 S Troubleshooting Likely Cause Things to Check Reference Page Number No image The projector is not turned on Is the projector s lamp on 18 100 in the Operating Guide The projector s input source isn t switched to LAN Is the projector switched to LAN 19 20 in the Operating Guide The projector that you want to connect to is nowhere to be found on the list of available projectors The computer and or projector s network settings are not configured correctly Check the network configurations of the computer and projector you change the projector s settings turn off the projector s AC power and then turn it on again If you simply put the projector in STANDBY power mode and then turn it on again the new settings might not take effect Firewall software other than Windows Firewall is installed in your computer Refer to the manual for the firewall software and take one of the following actions Exclude the LiveViewer from blocking item list Disable the firewall while using the LiveViewer YIOMJON BU uonoeuuo Can t communicate The computer and or projector s network settings are not configured correctly Check the network
80. and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery Keep a battery away from children and pets Do not recharge short circuit solder or disassemble a battery Do not place a battery in a fire or water Keep batteries in a dark cool and dry place f you observe battery leakage wipe out the leakage and then replace a battery If the leakage adheres to your body or clothes rinse well with water immediately Obey the local laws on disposing the battery About the remote control signal The remote control works with the projector s remote sensor This projector has a remote sensor on the front The sensor senses the signal within the following range when the sensor is active 60 degrees 30 degrees to the left and right of the sensor within 3 meters about approx NOTE The remote control signal reflected in the screen or the like may be available If it is difficult to send the signal to the sensor directly attempt to make the signal reflect The remote control uses infrared light to send signals to the projector Class 1 LED so be sure to use the remote control in an area free from obstacles that could block the remote control s signal to the projector The remote control may not work correctly if strong light such as direct sun light or light from an extremely close range such as from an inverter fluorescent lamp shines on the remote sensor of the projector Adjust the position of projector avoid
81. and or lamp cover or either of these has not been properly fixed Please turn the power off and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet and allow the projector to cool down at least 45 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation of the attachment state of the lamp and lamp cover and then turn the power on again The signal cables are not correctly connected Correctly connect the connection cables Signal source does not correctly work Correctly set up the signal source device by referring to the manual of the source device The input changeover settings are mismatched Select the input signal and correct the settings The BLANK function for pictures and the MUTE function for sounds are working AV MUTE may be active Refer to the item Sound does not come out and No pictures are displayed on the next page to turn off the MUTE and BLANK functions Continued on next page ViewSonic 102 Pro9500 Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects continued Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect Reference page Sound does not come out No pictures are displayed The signal cables are not correctly connected Correctly connect the audio cables 10 14 The MUTE function is working Restore the sound pressing MUTE or VOLUME button on the remote control 19 The volume is adjusted to an extreme
82. application from your computer by selecting Quit on the menu NOTE LiveViewer refer to the LiveViewer Lite for USB Network Guide and this application cannot 4 caret star Lye Viewer Lite tor USB white LeVine is be used at the same time If you connect your computer to the projector by using a USB cable while the LiveViewer is running the following message will be displayed If any application software having the firewall function is installed into your computer make the firwall function invalid with following the user s manual Some security software may block image transmission Please change the security software setting to allow the use of LiveViewer Lite for USB ViewSonic 89 Pro9500 USB Display continued Right Click menu The menu shown in the right will be displayed Display when you right click the application icon in the Windows notification area Quit e X 3 00PM Display The Floating menu is displayed and the icon disappears from the Windows notification area Quit The application is closed and the icon disappears from the Windows notification area NOTE If you wish to restart the application you need to unplug the USB cable and plug it again Floating menu If you select Display on the Right Click 0 0 menu the Floating menu shown in the right will appear on your computer screen aS Start capture button The transm
83. buttons or the remote control buttons is pressed or one of the commands except get commands is transmitted to the CONTROL port during the corresponding time projector will not be turned off Please refer to the section Turning off the power Using the A V buttons selects the function of USB TYPE B port To use this function you need to connect the USB TYPE B port of the projector and the type A USB port of a computer MOUSE lt gt USB DISPLAY MOUSE The accessory remote control works as the simple mouse and keyboard of the computer USB DISPLAY The port works as an input port that receives image signals from the computer It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port the following cases a message to notify you that USB TYPE B port is not available for picture input appears together with the USB TYPE B dialog This setting is switched to MOUSE while a picture input from the USB TYPE B port is projected The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input source while this setting is set to MOUSE Select USB DISPLAY in the dialog to project the picture input to the USB TYPE B port In this case you cannot use the simple mouse and keyboard function Otherwise select other port for picture input continued on next page ViewSonic 58 Pro9500 Description LAMP TIME FILTER TIME The lamp time is the usage time of the lamp counted after the last reset
84. computer For details of RS 232C commands refer to RS 232C Communication Network command table Connection 1 Turn off the projector and the computer 2 Connect the projectors CONTROL port and the computer s RS 232C port with a RS 232C cable cross Use the cable that fulfills the specification shown in figure 3 Turn the computer on and after the computer has started up turn the projector 4 Set the COMMUNICATION TYPE to OFF OPTION menu SERVICE COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide RS 232C S ide cross RS 232C port CONTROL port of the computer of the projector 00000 Q 0000 Q ViewSonic 196 Pro9500 Communicaion settings 1 Protocol 19200bps 8N1 2 Command format h shows hexadecimal Swwme o 2 7 9 16 12 Command Header Header Data Setting Action L L H lt SET gt Change setting to desired value cL cH aH 01h 00h c by eL eH L cH lt GET gt Read projector internal setup value bL aL aH 02h 008 bL bH 00h 00h INCREMENT Increment setup value BEN EFA O3h 06n 00h oan ooh bL bH 00h 00h DL bH by 1 lt DECREMENT gt Decrement setup value aL aH 05h 00h DL DH 00h 008 DL bH by 1 lt gt Run a Header code Packet Data size Set BEh EFh 03h 06h
85. configurations of the computer and projector An access point is used and your computer is connected to the access point via wireless LAN continued on next page ViewSonic 193 Use network utilities that may come with your computer or wireless LAN card to establish wireless network connection For detail refer to the manual of the computer or the card Pro9500 8 Troubleshooting Continued effects Glass Windows Vista Aero Reference Problem Likely Cause Things to Check Page Number The projector isn t capable Switching the priority to of relaying dynamic images Transmission Speed under 41 The projected such as PowerPoint the options menu may help image is rather animation at full speed to improve speed slow compared onus to that of the witching the priority to The compression rate being Transmission Speed under used for transferring the the options menu may help 41 images is too low to improve speed In some combinations of I computers viae cara ang adjustment Can t display application software there is function i vour application gt the movies a possibility that true image jease t SIUE Refer correctly especially movies played by media aes 3 manualin player cannot be transferred to vet pp s the projector with the LiveViewer D Network connection 9 between the 5 computer an
86. connected For setting of MONITOR OUT refer to SETUP menu in Operating Guide This completes the setting If Intellectual Stack with the RS 232C connection is used all settings or modifications related to Intellectual Stack menu operations must be performed on the Main projector The Main projector functions according to the input settings for Intellectual Stack 5 2 Checking Main projector s operating status For Intellectual Stack all settings or modifications related to menu operations must be performed on the Main projector Before operating the menu for Intellectual Stack check if the Main projector is functioning 1 Press the MENU button on the remote control 2 If the MENU dialog as shown on the right appears the screen the two projectors are operating in DUAL mode and the Main projector is operating Go to 5 4 Setting the menu If the dialog does not appear LAMP MODE is set to ALTERNATE and either the Main or Sub projector is operating Go to next Use the 4 4 gt buttons to go into the following menu ADVANCED MENU gt OPTION SERVICE COMMUNICATION STACK gt SERVICE gt COMMUNICATION mr STACK ALTERNATE MODE NORMAL SUB INPUT SOURCE FOLLOW MAIN UNIT S RETURN STACK menu will appear on screen Op erating Guide OPTION menu 4 Check the STACK MODE setting in the STACK menu If MAIN is displayed the Main projector is operating Go to 5 4 Setting the menu If
87. defaced modified or removed 2 Damage deterioration failure or malfunction resulting from a Accident abuse misuse neglect fire water lightning or other acts of nature improper maintenance unauthorized product modification or failure to follow instructions supplied with the product b Operation outside of product specifications C Operation of the product for other than the normal intended use or not under normal conditions d Repair or attempted repair by anyone not authorized by ViewSonic e Any damage of the product due to shipment f Removal or installation of the product 9 Causes external to the product such as electric power fluctuations or failure h Use of supplies or parts not meeting ViewSonic s specifications i Normal wear and tear j Any other cause which does not relate to a product defect 3 Removal installation and set up service charges ViewSonic 280 Pro9500 How to get service 1 For information about receiving service under warranty contact ViewSonic Customer Support please refer to Customer Support page You will need to provide your product s serial number 2 To obtain warranted service you will be required to provide a the original dated sales slip b your name c your address d a description of the problem and e the serial number of the product 3 Take or ship the product freight prepaid in the original container to an authorized ViewSonic service center or Vie
88. dialog use the A cursor buttons to adjust the magnification ratio The magnification ratio will be adjusted with fine steps And changes in the ratio in single steps are subtle so they may be hard to recognize 5 Press the MAGNIFY OFF button on the remote control to exit magnification The MAGNIFY dialog will automatically disappear in several seconds with no operation The dialog will appear again if the MAGNIFY ON button is pressed when the dialog has automatically disappeared While the MAGNIFY dialog is displayed press the MAGNIFY ON button to switch the dialog between magnifying area shifting with the triangles and magnification ratio adjustment with the magnifying glass icon e The magnification is automatically disabled when the displaying signal or its display condition is changed e While the magnification is active the keystone distortion condition may vary It will be restored when the magnification is disabled e Some horizontal stripes might be visible on the image while magnification is active This function is not available in the following cases The USB TYPE A port is selected as the input source A sync signal in the range not supported is input There is no input signal ViewSonic 30 Pro9500 Temporarily freezing the screen EREEZE bition 1 Press the FREEZE button on the remote control The FREEZE indication will appear on the screen however the indication will not appear when the O
89. displayed by using schedule function via the web browser Refer to item 7 3 Event Scheduling for the detail ViewSonic 176 Pro9500 5 Messenger Function Continued Configure the following items from a web browser when Messenger function is used Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Port Settings on the main menu 4 Click the Enable check box to open the Messenger Port Port 9719 Click the Enable check box for the Authentication setting when authentication is required otherwise clear the check box 5 Click the Apply button to save the settings eos on Port Settings 1 When the authentication setting is enabled the following settings are required 6 Click the Security Settings on the main menu 7 Select the Network Control and enter the desired authentication password 8 Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control Port1 Port 23 Network Control Port2 Port 9715 PJLink Port Port 4352 My Image Port Port 9716 and Messenger Port Port 9719 The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network co
90. elated imessages orici 98 Regarding the 99 Shutting the projector down 1 2 0 92 9 44 6 101 settings 101 Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects 102 Specifications 106 ViewSonic 3 Pro9500 Network Guide 1 Connection to the Network 108 1 1 System requirements 108 1 1 1 Required equipment preparation sismis rieur A enne nnne 108 1 1 2 Hardware and software requirement for computer 108 1 2 Installing the LiveViewer 110 1 2 1 Installifig the EIVeVIeWeT uuu n tnr nne nr tree ne 110 1 3 Process to connect the network 112 1 3 1 Process overview 1 3 2 Starting the LiveViewer 1 4 Selecting the network connection mode 114 1 4 1 Selecting either the wireless LAN or wired LAN 114 1 4 2 Selecting My Conneclon cree ee cp uteri eate eae ee tege ena irre tcs 116 1 5 Selecting the network connection method 116 1 5 1 Passcode connectiori 2555 rrt nr et nte re PO cre
91. for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However
92. input from USB TYPE A port USB TYPE B Selects input from USB TYPE B port HDMI Selects input from HDMI port COMPUTER IN1 Selects the input from COMPUTER port COMPUTER IN2 Selects the input from COMPUTER IN2 port COMPONENT Selects the input from COMPONENT ports S VIDEO Selects the input from S VIDEO port VIDEO Selects the input from VIDEO port SLIDESHOW Selects the input from USB TYPE A and starts a Slideshow MY IMAGE Displays the MY IMAGE menu MESSENGER Turns the messenger text displayed on the screen on off 5 Messenger Function in the Network Guide When there is no transferred text data to display the message NO MESSENGER DATA appears INFORMATION Displays SYSTEM INFORMATION INPUT INFORMATION NETWORK INFORMATION or nothing AUTO KEYSTONE Performs automatic keystone distortion correction MY MEMORY Loads one of adjustment data stored When more than one data are saved the adjustment changes every time the MY BUTTON is pressed When no data is saved in memory the dialog No saved data appears When the current adjustment is not saved to memory the dialog as shown in the right appears If you want to keep the current adjustment please press the gt button to exit Otherwise loading a data will overwrite the current adjusted condition gt No saved data continued on next page ViewSonic 60 Pro9500 Description ACTIVE IRIS Changes the
93. installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Warning You are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment For Canada This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada CE Conformity for European Countries C The device complies with the EMC Directive 2004 108 EC and Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC Following information is only for EU member states The mark is in compliance with the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive 2002 96 EC W
94. must be set The projector will retrieve Date and Time information from the time server and override time settings when SNTP is enabled The internal clock s time may not remain accurate Using SNTP is recommended to maintain accurate time ViewSonic 163 Pro9500 3 9 Security Settings Displays and configures passwords and other security settings Item Description User Account Configures the user name and password Configures the user name User name The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters Configures the password Password The length of the text can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters Re enter Password Reenter the above password for verification Configures the Authentication password for the command twork Control Control Authentication Configures the Authentication password The length of the Password text can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters Re enter Authentication Reenter the above password for verification Password SNMP Configures the community name if SNMP is used Configures the community name The length of the text can be up to 64 alphanumeric characters Community name Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the
95. network connection by clicking the Network Restart on the main menu Only numbers 0 9 and alphabet a z A Z can be used ViewSonic 164 Pro9500 3 10 Projector Control The items shown in the table below can be performed using the Projector Control menu Select an item with the mouse Most of the items have a submenu Refer to the table below for details Value rom 0 to 6 tater from 0 t0 6 a i B NOTE The setting value may not match with the actual value if the user changes the value manually In that case please refresh the page by clicking the Refresh button Controls the projector Item Description MAIN POWER Turns the power on off INPUT SOURCE Selects the input source PICTURE MODE Selects the picture mode setting BLANK ON OFF Turns Blank on off MUTE Turns Mute on off FREEZE Turns Freeze on off Controls the magnify setting MAGNIFY In some input signal sources it might stop Magnify even though it does not reach to maximum setting value MAGNIFY POSITION V Adjusts the vertical magnify position MAGNIFY POSITION H Adjusts the horizontal magnify position TEMPLATE Turns template on off MY IMAGE Selects MY IMAGE data MY IMAGE DELETE Deletes MY IMAGE data ViewSonic 165 Pro9500 3 10 Projector Control Continued Item Description PICTURE BRIGHTNESS Adjusts the
96. of replacement by yourself follow the following procedure 3 Loosen the screw marked by arrow of the lamp cover and then slide and lift the lamp cover to the side to remove it Loosen the 3 screws marked by arrow of the lamp and slowly pick up the lamp by the handles Never loosen any other screws Insert the new lamp and retighten firmly the 3 screws of the lamp that are loosened in the previous process to lock it in place While putting the interlocking parts of the lamp cover and the projector together slide the lamp cover back in place Then firmly fasten the screw of the lamp cover Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time using the LAMP TIME item in the OPTION menu 1 Press the MENU button to display a menu 2 Point at the ADVANCED MENU in the menu using the V A button then press the button 3 Point at the OPTION in the left column of the menu using the V A button then press the button 4 Point at the LAMP TIME using the V A button then press the gt button A dialog will appear 5 Press the gt button to select on the dialog It performs resetting the lamp time NOTE Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp for a suitable indication about the lamp ViewSonic 92 Pro9500 lamp cover Handles 1 oc Replacing the lamp continued Lamp warning HIGH VOLTAGE HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE ANWARNING p The projecto
97. primary function of the PC LESS Presentation after selecting the USB TYPE A port as the input source Thumbnail menu Selected image 016 REMOVE USB CENTER amp SET Thumbnail images ViewSonic 81 Pro9500 PC LESS Presentation continued Operating by buttons or keys You can control the images in the Thumbnail screen with the remote control or keypad or a web browser software The following functions can be supported while the Thumbnail is displayed Button operation The remote control The keypad on the projector Web Remote in web Functions browser software AlYV lt gt AlV lt gt AlV lt gt Move cursor PAGE UP PAGE DOWN PAGE UP PAGE DOWN Switches pages Displays the selected image on the Full Screen mode when cursor is on a thumbnail image Displays the SETUP menu for the selected image when a cursor is on a thumbnail image number The SETUP menu for the selected image Functions RETURN START STOP SKIP ROTATE ViewSonic Use the lt gt cursor buttons to switch each setting or use the gt cursor button to execute the functions as follows Press the cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail Screen Switch to ON to set the selected image as the first image in the Slideshow This setting information will be saved in the playlist txt file Switch to ON to set the selected image as the las
98. reply 5 is added 1 ACK reply 06h Refer to RS 232C communication 2 NAK reply 15h Refer to RS 232C communication 3 Error reply 1Ch 0000h Refer to RS 232C communication 4 Data reply 1Dh xxxxh Refer to RS 232C communication 5 Authentication error reply 1Fh 0400h When authentication error occurred the projector returns the error code TCP 9715 1 Command format The commands some datum are added to the head and the end of the ones of 9715 are used Header Data length RS 232C command Check sum Connection ID 0x02 0x0D 13 bytes 1 byte 1 byte Header 02 Fixed Data Length RS 232C commands byte length 0xOD Fixed RS 232C commands Refer to RS 232C Communication command format Check Sum This is the value to make zero on the addition of the lower 8 bits from the header to the checksum Connection ID Random value from 0 to 255 This value is attached to the reply data NOTE Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an undefined command or data Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any other code Commands are not accepted during warm up ViewSonic 201 Pro9500 2 Response code Error code h shows hexadecimal The connection ID is attached for the TCP 23 s response error codes are used The connection ID is same as the sending command format 1 reply 06h xxh xxh connection ID 2 NAK reply 1
99. return to the menu after setting the TIME DIFFERENCE Use the 4 buttons to enter the Year last two digits Month Date Hour and Minute DATE AND The projector will override this setting and retrieve TIME DATE AND TIME information from the Time server when SNTP is enabled 3 9 Date Time Settings in the Network Guide continued on next page ViewSonic 68 Pro9500 Description 1 Use the buttons on the NETWORK menu to select the PROJECTOR NAME and press the gt button The PROJECTOR NAME dialog will be displayed 2 The current PROJECTOR NAME will be m on the first 3 lines Particular projector name is pre assigned by default Use the 4 gt buttons and the ENTER INPUT button to select and enter characters To erase 1 character at one time press the RESET button or press the 4 and INPUT button at the same time Also if you move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and push the ENTER or INPUT button 1 character or all characters will be erased The PROJECTOR NAME can be input up to 64 PROJECTOR characters NAME 3 To change an already inserted character press the A Y button to move the cursor to one of the first lines and use the lt P gt buttons to move the cursor on the character to be changed After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button the character is selected Then follow the same procedure as described at the item 2 above 4 To finish entering text move th
100. set to the upper limit position ZOOM ring should not be set to the widest position HORIZONTAL adjuster is recommended to be set near the center position ViewSonic 228 Pro9500 Installation Setting up Set A 1 Tum on Set A 2 Set the lens position to the upper limit with the VERTICAL adjuster NOTE is not set to the upper limit the image of Set B may not superimpose well enough to the image of Set A Perform the MIRROR setting first if necessary as it may change the image position Operating Guide SETUP menu HORIZONTAL adjuster is recommended to be set near the center position 3 Adjust the image of Set A to fit the screen with the VERTICAL adjuster HORIZONTAL adjuster ZOOM ring and FOCUS ring User s Manual con cise gt Displaying the picture Adjust the image position using KEYSTONE and PERFECT FIT if necessary Operating Guide EASY MENU or SETUP menu NOTE Do not adjust ZOOM ring to the widest position otherwise the image of Set B may not superimpose well enough to the image of Set A Fine adjusting the image position of Set B electrically does not increase its image size Use the ZOOM ring to adjust the image size of Set B to slightly larger than Set A KEYSTONE cannot be operated when PERFECT FIT is in use To adjust the image using both KEYSTONE and PERFECT FIT adjust KEYSTONE first If you are using Simple Stack go to 2 3 Installation of the second projector Set
101. subnet mask when DHCP is disabled Default Gateway Configures the default gateway when DHCP is disabled Configures the name of the projector The length of the Projector Name can be up to 64 alphanumeric Projector Name characters Only alphabets numbers and following symbols can be used 96 amp Q V 79 and space Particular projector name is pre assigned by default Configures the location to be referred to when using SNMP sysLocation SNMP The length of the sysLocation can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters Only numbers 0 9 and alphabet a z A Z can be used Configures the contact information to be referred to when using SNMP The length of the sysContact can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters Only numbers 0 9 and alphabet a z 2 can be used DNS Server Address Configures the DNS server address Configures the AMX Device Discovery setting to detect the projector AMX D D from the controllers of AMX connected to the same network For the AMX Device Discovery details of AMX Device Discovery visit the AMX web site URL http www amx com sysContact SNMP Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection by clicking the
102. the projector consists of the plural number of independent software modules and there exist our copyright or and third party copyrights for each of such software modules The projector also uses software modules that we have developed or and produced And there exist our copyright and intellectual property for each of such software and related items including but not limited to the software related documents These rights above are protected by copyright law and other applicable laws And the projector uses software modules licensed as Freeware upon GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 and GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 1 established by Free Software Foundation Inc U S or license agreements for each software Refer following web page for license agreements for such software modules and other software web page address http www viewsonic com products pro9500 htm Contact dealer in your region for inquiry regarding licensed software Refer to license agreement of each software in following pages and license agreements of each software on the web page for detail of the license conditions and so on The original in English is carried since the license agreement following is established by third party other than us Because the program the software module is licensed free of charge the program is provided as is without warranty of any kind either expressed or implied to the extent permitted by applicable law And we do n
103. the same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License In other cases permission to use a particular library in non free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software For example permission to use the GNU C Library in non free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system as well as its variant the GNU Linux operating system Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users freedom it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and a work that uses the library The former contains code derived from the library whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License also called this License
104. under User authority Click the OK then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed even though the network is not established Click 2 on the main and go back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method Consult to the network administrator Log in the Windows under Administrator authority After that please resume at item 1 3 2 Starting the LiveViewer E f you need to add a Network configuration on your computer to connect to the projector This dialog will be displayed when you Do you want to apply suggested network settings as follows need to add a Network configuration on Wiss your computer to connect to the projector S retmek zmzmzeo Confirm with your network administrator if Not displaying confirmation dl for aking Network settings the Network configuration displayed on the dialog is OK and then click the Yes Click the NO then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed even though the network is not established Click on the main menu and go back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method ViewSonic 122 Pro9500 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued If you put a check mark in the box Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings the projector memorizes current configuration and this dialog is not displayed again To display this dialog again click Option icon in the LiveViewer main menu and remove the
105. vertical position to the default setting Pressing the RESET button when the V POSITION is selected will reset the V POSITION to the default setting When this function is performed on a video signal or an s video signal the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN setting It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10 This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B or HDMI port Using the lt P gt buttons adjusts the horizontal position Right lt gt Left Over adjusting the horizontal position may cause noise to appear on the screen If this occurs please reset the horizontal position to the default setting Pressing the RESET button when the H POSITION is selected will reset the H POSITION to the default setting When this function is performed on a video signal or an s video signal the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN setting It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10 This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B or HDMI port continued on next page ViewSonic 40 Pro9500 Description H PHASE AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE ViewSonic Using the lt buttons adjusts the horizontal phase to eliminate flicker Right lt gt Left This item can be selected only for a computer signal or a component video signal This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B or HDMI port
106. volume in a large space like a classroom without external speakers Contents of package Your projector should come with the items shown below Check that all the items are included Require of your dealer immediately if any items are missing 1 Remote control with two AA batteries 2 Power cord 3 4 5 User s manuals Book x1 CD x1 Computer cable Lens cover NOTE Keep the original packing materials for future reshipment Be sure to use the original packing materials when moving the projector Use special caution for the lens The projector may make a rattling sound when tilted moved or shaken since a flap to control the air flow inside of the projector has moved Be aware that this is not a failure or malfunction ViewSonic 6 Pro9500 Part names Projector 1 Lamp cover The lamp unit is inside 2 Speakers x2 3 Filter cover The air filter and intake vent are inside Elevator feet x2 Elevator buttons x2 Remote sensor Lens Lens cover Pocket caps 0 Intake vents 1 Control panel 2 Lens adjuster door The adjusters for the lens are behind the door 13 AC IN AC inlet 14 Exhaust vent 15 Rear panel 16 Security bar 17 Battery cover The internal clock battery is inside 18 Heel ANWARNING p Do not open or remove any portion of the product unless the manuals direct it gt Do not subject the projector to unstable cond
107. will appear Reenter the same PIN code This will complete the PIN 222721 code registration f there is no key input for about 55 seconds while the Enter PIN Code box or the PIN Code again box is displayed the menu will close If necessary repeat the process from 1 1 Afterwards anytime the projector is restarted after AC power is turned off the Enter PIN Code box will be displayed Enter the registered PIN code The projector can be used after entering the registered PIN code If an incorrect PIN code is input the Enter PIN code box will be displayed again If an incorrect PIN code is input 3 times the projector will turn off Afterwards the projector will turn off every time an incorrect PIN code is input The projector will also turn off if there is no key input for about 5 minutes while the Enter PIN code box is displayed This function will activate only when the projector is started after AC power is turned off Please do not forget your PIN code 2 Turning off the PIN LOCK 2 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the PIN LOCK on off menu 2 2 Use the A Y buttons to select OFF and the Enter PIN Code box will be displayed Enter the registered PIN code to turn the PIN LOCK function off If an incorrect PIN code is input 3 times the projector will turn off 3 If you have forgotten your PIN code 3 1 While the Enter PIN code box is displayed press and hold the RESET button for three seconds or press and hold the IN
108. your destination If you want to copy a history record to a profile data select one of the history record and click the Register to profile The profile data cannot be erased automatically NOTE number of the history record is maximum 10 for each network adapter When the 11th data is stored the oldest record among the 10 will be overwritten The date amp time information in each history record is renewed when the network is connected by using the history record If the DHCP is set on in the projector the network connection between the projector and computer may not be established since IP address may be varied Even if you use the profile connection it will be memorized as a history record ViewSonic 128 Pro9500 1 7 Configuring the network settings manually Projector Connection setting for the network connection between the projector and computer is input manually Select the manual connection method you would to use Profile Profile name Date created Profile 1 11 30 2009 3 19 46 PM Profile 2 11 30 2009 3 19 41 PM Select the Configure Network Settings Manually Lew My Connection C History Projector name address Last connected Projector 1 192 168 1 101 11 30 2009 3 23 24 Projector 2 192 168 1 102 11 30 2009 3 22 24 PM Projector 3 192 168 1 103 11 30 2009 3 21 24 Register to profile The information to be inp
109. 0 67 07 01 00 05 30 OD 00 POLSKI BE EF 03 06 00 97 D7 01 00 05 30 OE 00 T RK E BE EF 03 06 00 07 D6 01 00 05 30 OF 00 Get EF 03 06 00 C4 D3 02 00 05 30 00 00 Get EF 03 06 00 04 07 0200 15 30 00 00 Increment BE EF 03 06 00 62 D7 04 00 15 30 00 00 Decrement 03 06 00 06 05 00 15 30 00 00 MENU POSITION H Execute EF 03 06 00 DC C6 06 00 43 70 00 00 Reset Get EF 03 06 00 40 07 0200 16 30 00 00 Md V Increment EF 03 06 00 26 07 04 00 16 30 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 F7 06 05 00 16 30 00 00 MENU POSITION V Execute BE EF 03 06 00 AB C7 06 00 44 70 00 00 Reset MyScreen BE EF 03 06 00 01 00 00 30 20 00 ORIGINAL BE EF 03 06 00 FB E2 01 00 00 30 40 00 BLANK Set BLUE BE EF 03 06 00 03 01 00 00 30 03 00 WHITE 03 06 00 6B DO 01 05 00 BLACK BE EF 03 06 00 9B DO 01 00 00 30 06 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 08 D3 02 00 00 30 00 00 m OFF 03 06 00 FB 08 01 00 20 30 00 00 BLANK On Off ON 03 06 00 6B D9 01 00 20 30 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 C8 D8 02 00 20 30 00 00 MyScreen EF 03 06 00 CB 01 00 04 30 20 00 Set ORIGINAL BE EF 03 06 00 02 01 00 04 30 00 00 STARTUP OFF BE EF 03 06 00 9B D3 01 00 04 30 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 38
110. 0 2 7 1 5 3 9 155 6 6 258 174 69 25 10 150 3 0 2 3 4 5 179 7 5 297 229 90 0 033 19 5 0 195 8 2 323 218 86 31 12 200 4 1 3 0 6 1 239 10 1 396 305 120 0 0 4 4 2 5 6 6 261 11 0 432 291 114 42 16 250 5 1 3 8 7 6 300 12 6 496 381 150 0 0 5 5 3 1 8 3 327 13 7 541 363 143 52 20 300 6 1 4 6 9 1 360 15 1 596 457 180 0 0 6 6 3 7 10 0 393 16 5 650 436 172 62 25 continued on next page ViewSonic 10 Pro9500 Arrangement continued ANWARNING Install the projector where you can access the power outlet easily If an abnormality should occur unplug the projector urgently Otherwise it could cause a fire or electric shock gt Do not subject the projector to unstable conditions If the projector falls or topples over it could result in injury or damage to the projector and the surrounding things Using a damaged projector could result in a fire and an electric shock Do not place the projector in unstable places such as an inclined surface places subject to vibration on top of a wobbly table or cart or a surface that is smaller than the projector Do not put the projector on its side front or rear position Do not attach nor place anything on the projector unless otherwise specified in the manual Do not use any mounting accessories except the accessories specified by the manufacturer Read and keep the manuals of the accessories used For special installation such as ceiling mounting be sur
111. 0 MB or higher USB Port USB cable 1 piece Select the USB DISPLAY for the USB TYPE B item in the OPTION menu When you connect your computer to the USB TYPE B port on the projector using a USB cable the projector will be recognized as a CD ROM drive on your computer Then the software in the projector LiveViewerLiteForUSB exe will run automatically and the application LiveViewer Lite for USB will be ready on your computer for the USB Display The application LiveViewer Lite for USB will be automatically closed when the USB cable is unplugged NOTE If the software does not start automatically this is typically because CD ROM autorun is disabled on your OS follow the instructions below 1 Click on the Start button on the toolbar and select the Run 2 Enter F LiveViewerLiteForUSB exe and then press the OK If your CD ROM drive is not drive F on your computer you will need to replace F with the correct drive letter assigned to your CD ROM drive CD ROM autorun is disabled while the screen saver is running The image transmission from the computer is suspended while the password protected screen saver is running To resume the transmission exit the screen saver Check our web site for the latest version of the software and its manual Follow the instructions that can be obtained at the site for updating This application will appear in the Windows notification area once it starts You can quit the
112. 00 8C D8 02 00 23 30 00 00 OFF BE EF 03 06 00 62 01 00 00 37 00 00 Set ON EF 03 06 00 6A 63 01 00 00 37 01 00 AUTO BE EF 03 06 00 9A 63 01 00 00 37 02 00 Get EF 03 06 00 C9 62 02 00 00 37 00 00 Set CAPTIONS BE EF 03 06 00 06 63 01 00 01 37 00 00 C MODE TEXT BE EF 03 06 00 96 62 01 00 01 37 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 35 63 02 00 01 37 00 00 1 EF 03 06 00 02 62 01 00 02 37 01 00 2 EF 03 06 00 22 62 01 00 02 37 02 00 mE Set BE EF 03 06 00 B2 63 01 00 02 37 03 00 4 EF 03 06 00 82 61 01 00 02 37 04 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 71 63 02 00 02 37 00 00 OFF BE EF 03 06 00 B6 D6 01 00 16 20 00 00 AUTO SEARCH Set ON BE EF 03 06 00 26 07 01 00 16 20 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 85 D6 02 00 16 20 00 00 AUTO Set OFF BE EF 03 06 00 EA D1 01 00 OF 20 00 00 KEYSTONE ON BE EF 03 06 00 7A DO 01 00 OF 20 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 D9 D1 02 00 OF 20 00 00 OFF BE EF 03 06 00 3B 89 01 00 20 31 00 00 EF 03 06 00 88 01 00 20 31 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 08 89 02 00 20 31 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 08 86 02 00 10 31 00 00 ids s Increment BE EF 03 06 00 6E 86 04 00 10 31 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 BF 87 05 00 10 31 00 00 Sat MOUSE BE EF 03 06 00 FF 23 01 00 50 26 00 00
113. 00h to byte number 0 4 CRC flag For byte number 5 6 refer to RS 232C Communication Network command table Action Set functional code to byte number 7 8 SET 01h 00h lt GET gt 02h 00h INCREMENT 04h 001 lt DECREMENT gt 05h 00h lt EXECUTE gt 06h 00h Refer to the Communication command table Type Setting code For byte number 9 12 refer to RS 232C Communication Network command table ViewSonic 197 Pro9500 3 Response code Error code h shows hexadecimal 1 ACK reply 06h When the projector receives the Set Increment Decrement or Execute command correctly the projector changes the setting data for the specified item by Type and it returns the code 2 NAK reply 15h When the projector cannot understand the received command the projector returns the error code In such a case check the sending code and send the same command again 3 Error reply 1Ch 0000h When the projector cannot execute the received command for any reasons the projector returns the error code In such a case check the sending code and the setting status of the projector 4 Data reply 1Dh xxxxh When the projector receives the GET command correctly the projector returns the responce code and 2 bytes of data NOTE For connecting the projector to your devices please read the manual for each devices and connect them correctly with suitable cables Operation cannot b
114. 02 35 00 00 MY IMAGE WAAGE SIDE Execute 03 06 c2 06 oo 0335 0000 MY IMAGE AGEA Delale Execute EF 03 06 00 BD c3 06 00 04 35 0000 218 Pro9500 PJllink command Commands Control Description Parameter or Response POWR Power Contorol 0 Standby 1 POWR Power Status inquiry 0 Standby 1 2 Cool Down INPT Input Source selection 11 COMPUTER IN 1 12 COMPUTER IN 2 21 COMPONENT 22 S VIDEO 23 VIDEO 31 41 USB 51 LAN 52 USB INPT Input Source inquiry 11 COMPUTER IN 1 12 COMPUTER IN 2 21 COMPONENT 22 S VIDEO 23 VIDEO 31 HDMI 41 USB 51 LAN 52 USB TYPEB AVMT AN Mute 10 BLANK off 11 BLANK on 20 Mute off 21 Mute on 30 AV Mute off 31 AV Mute on AVMT AN Mute inquiry 10 BLANK off 11 BLANK on 20 Mute off 21 Mute on 30 AV Mute off 31 AV Mute on continued on next page ViewSonic 219 Pro9500 Commands Control Description Parameter or Response 1st byte Refers to Fan error one of 0 to 2 2nd byte Refers to Lamp error one of 0 to 2 3rd byte Refers to Temptrature error one of 0 to 2 Ath byte
115. 05 Pro9500 Specifications Item Specification Product name Liquid crystal projector Liquid Crystal 786 432 pixels 1024 horizontal x 768 vertical Panel Lamp 245 W UHP Speaker 16 W mono 8 W x2 Power supply Rated current AC100 120 V 4 0 A AC220 240 V 2 0A Power consumption AC100 120 V 380 W AC220 240 V 360 W Temperature gt E range 5 35 Operating Size 401 W x 103 H x 318 D mm Not including protruding parts Weight mass approx 4 6 kg COMPUTER 1 D sub 15 pin mini jack x1 COMPUTER IN2 H V G Y B Cb Pb R Cr Pr BNC jack x5 HOMI uuu eere HDMI connector x1 MONOTOR OUT D sub 15 pin mini jack x1 COMPONENT Y Cr Pr RCA jack x3 S VIDEO Mini DIN 4 pin jack x1 VIDEO cato RCA jack x1 AUDIO INA 3 5 mm stereo mini jack x1 Ports AUDIO IN2 e 3 5 mm stereo mini jack x1 AUDIO L RCA jack x2 AUDIO OUT RCA jack x2 USB TYPE A USB type A connector x1 USB B u uu e USB type B connector x1 CONTROL niit enirn en D sub 9 pin plug x1 LAN RJ45 jack x1 MIC 3 5 mm mono mini jack x1 REMOTE CONTROL 3 5 mm stereo mini jack x1 Lamp RLC 063 DT01175 Siona pa
116. 05 00 93 30 00 00 p gamma Execute BE 03 06 00 1 c2 06 00 53 70 00 00 Get EF 06 38 FF 02 00 94 30 00 00 di Increment 03 06 00 FF 04 00 94 30 00 00 Decrement EF 06 00 8F 05 00 94 30 00 00 User Gamma Execute BE EF 03 06 00 68 06 00 54 70 00 00 Point 5 Reset continued on next page ViewSonic 206 Pro9500 Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code Get EF 03 06 00 4 02 00 95 30 00 00 Increment BE EF 06 00 A2 04 00 95 30 00 00 Decrement EF 03 06 00 73 FF 0500 95 30 00 00 User Gamma Med Execute EF 06 00 94 C2 06 00 55 70 00 00 Get EF 06 00 80 FE 02 00 96 30 00 00 EMT Increment EF 06 00 E6 FE 04 00 96 30 00 00 Decrement EF 03 06 00 37 FF 05 00 96 30 00 00 User Gamma Execute EF 06 00 Do c2 00 56 70 00 00 Point 7 Reset nem Get EF 06 00 7C FF 02 00 97 30 00 00 aorta Increment EF 03 06 00 1 04 00 97 30 00 00 Decrement EF 06 00 05 00 97 30 00 00 User Gamma Execute
117. 06 00 F2 CD 05 00 66 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 9D CF 02 00 6C 20 00 00 Increment BE EF 03 06 00 FB CF 04 00 6C 20 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 2A CE 05 00 6C 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 D9 CF 02 00 6F 20 00 00 40 Increment BE EF 03 06 00 BF CF 04 00 6F 20 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 6E CE 05 00 6F 20 00 00 Sei OFF BE EF 03 06 00 46 D3 01 00 02 20 00 00 MUTE ON BE EF 03 06 00 D6 D2 01 00 02 20 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 75 D3 02 00 02 20 00 00 Set ON BE EF 03 06 00 FE D4 01 00 1C 20 01 00 SPEAKER OFF BE EF 03 06 00 6E D5 01 00 1C 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 5D D5 02 00 1C 20 00 00 AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 6E DC 01 00 30 20 01 00 AUDIO Set AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 9E DC 01 00 30 20 02 00 SOURCE AUDIO IN3 EF 03 06 00 OE DD 01 00 30 20 03 00 COMPUTER IN1 OFF EF 03 06 00 FE DD 01 00 30 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 CD DD 02 00 30 20 00 00 AUDIO IN1 EF 03 06 00 5 DD 01 00 34 20 01 00 AUDIO Set AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 AE DD 01 00 34 20 02 00 SOURCE AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 3E DC 01 00 34 20 03 00 COMPUTER IN2 OFF BE EF 03 06 00 CE DC 01 00 34 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 FD DC 02 00 34 20 00 00 OFF BE EF 03 06 00 DA DF 01 00 3B 20 00 00 AUDIO Set AUDIO1 BE EF 03 06 00 4A DE 01 00 3B
118. 20 01 00 SOURCE LAN AUDIO2 BE EF 03 06 00 BA DE 01 00 3B 20 02 00 AUDIO3 BE EF 03 06 00 2A DF 01 00 3B 20 03 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 DF 02 00 20 00 00 continued on next page ViewSonic 213 Pro9500 Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code OFF BE EF 03 06 00 76 DD 01 00 36 20 00 00 AUDIO Set AUDIO1 BE EF 03 06 00 6 DC 01 00 36 20 01 00 SOURCE USB AUDIO2 BE EF 03 06 00 16 DC 01 00 36 20 02 00 TYPEA AUDIO3 EF 03 06 00 86 DD 01 00 36 20 03 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 45 DD 02 00 36 20 00 00 OFF EF 03 06 00 AE DE 01 00 3C 20 00 00 AUDIO Set AUDIO1 BE EF 03 06 00 DF 01 00 20 01 00 SOURCE USB AUDIO2 EF 03 06 00 CE DF 01 00 20 02 00 B AUDIO3 BE EF 03 06 00 5E DE 01 00 20 03 00 Get EF 03 06 00 9D DE 02 00 3C 20 00 00 OFF EF 03 06 00 BADD 0100 33 20 00 00 AUDIO1 BE EF 03 06 00 2A DC 01 00 33 20 01 00 SOURCE Set AUDIO2 EF 03 06 00 DA DC 01 00 33 20 02 00 HDMI AUDIO3 BE EF 03 06 00 4A DD 01 00 33 20 03 00 AUDIO_HDMI EF 03 06 00 7A C4 01 00 33 20 20 00 Get EF 03 06 00 89 DD 02 00 33 20 00 00 AUD
119. 21 24 Register to profile Configure Network Settings Manually 3 Select one of the profile data listed in the smi me window and put a mark in the check box The data selected before is turned unmarked ER mS Ethernet Adapter 4 Click the OK then the window is closed ss If you don t want to select a new one click the Cancel OK Cancel NOTE If you don t want to use the My Connection mark data listed the window and click the OK In the list all profile data are shown no matter which network adapter is selected You can register a profile data that is not for currently selected network adapter as the My Connection profile data ViewSonic 139 Pro9500 1 9 Profile data continued Also you can register a profile data to M y Connection when the network connection is established When it is established the Connection to Projector successful screen is displayed If you wish to use the current connection setting for My Connection check in the box for the Register this setting to My Connection And then if it is okay to overwrite the present data for My Connection click the OK A new profile data will be created and it i S registered as My Connection profile data Connection to Projector successful Projector name 012345678945 IP address 192 168 1 100 Are you sure that you want to display images
120. 400bps f PARITY NONE lt gt ODD lt gt EVEN The BAUD RATE is fixed to 19200bps and PARITY is fixed NONE when the COMMUNICATION TYPE is set to OFF TRANSMISSION METHOD Select the transmission method for communication by the NETWORK BRIDGE from the CONTROL port HALF DUPLEX lt FULL DUPLEX HALF DUPLEX This method lets the projector make two way communication but only one direction either transmitting or receiving data is allowed at a time FULL DUPLEX This method lets the projector make two way communication transmitting and receiving data at the same time HALF DUPLEX is selected as the default setting If you select HALF DUPLEX check the setting of the item RESPONSE LIMIT TIME 64 Pro9500 Description SERVICE COMMUNICATION continued continued continued on next page ViewSonic RESPONSE LIMIT TIME Select the time period to wait for receiving response data from other device communicating by the NETWORK BRIDGE and the HALF DUPLEX through the CONTROL port OFF lt gt 1 lt gt 2s lt gt 3s OFF Select this mode if it is not required to check the responses from the device that the projector sends data to In this mode the projector can send out data from the computer continuously 1s 2s 3s Select the time period to keep the projector waiting for response from the device that the projector sends data to While waiting the response the pr
121. 5h xxh 3 Error reply 1Ch 0000h xxh 4 Data reply 1Dh xxxxh xxh 5 Authentication error reply 1Fh 0400h xxh 6 Projector busy reply 1 xxxxh xxh When the projector is too busy to receives the command the projector returns the error code In such a case check the sending code and send the same command again Automatic Connection Break The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no communication for 30 seconds after being established Authentication The projector does not accept commands without authentication success when authentication is enabled The projector uses a challenge response type authentication with an MD5 Message Digest 5 algorithm When the projector is using a LAN a random 8 bytes will be returned if authentication is enabled Bind this received 8 bytes and the authentication password and digest this data with the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the commands to send Following is a sample if the authentication password is set to password and the random 8 bytes are 572160 1 Select the projector 2 Receive the random 8 bytes a572f60c from the projector 3 Bind the random 8 bytes a572f60c and the authentication password password and it becomes a572f60cpassword 4 Digest this bind a572f60cpassword with MD5 algorithm It will be e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde 5 Add this e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde in front of the comman
122. 6 00 6A 01 00 2036 01 00 Get 06 C9 38 02 00 20 36 0000 aon ERE Get 06 D7 02 00 10 30 00 00 agni sion Increment EF 03 06 00 07 04 00 1030 00 00 Decrement 06 7 06 05 00 10 30 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 34 D6 02 00 1130 00 00 agni osmon Increment EF 06 52 D6 04 00 1130 0000 Decrement EF 03 06 00 83 07 05 00 1130 00 00 OFF 06 FF 3D 01 00 30 26 00 00 5 Set ON 06 6F 3C 01 00 30 26 01 00 Get 06 CC 02 00 30 26 0000 OFF 03 06 00 03 01 00 3126 0000 ee Pel ON EF 06 93 00 31 26 0100 Get EF 06 30 02 00 3126 0000 OFF 06 00 01 00 00 35 00 00 IMAGE 1 06 00 AA 2 01 00 0035 0100 Set IMAGE 2 03 06 00 5 2 01 00 0035 02 00 MY IMAGE 79 IMAGE 3 EF 06 00 00 35 03 00 IMAGE 4 03 06 00 C1 01 00 00 35 04 00 Get 06 09 02 00 0035 00 00 MY IMAGE MACET eins Execute EF 03 74 06 00 35 00 00 MY IMAGE IMAGE 2 Genin Execute EF 03 35 06 oo
123. 83 04 00 03 21 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 FE 82 05 00 03 21 00 00 Get EF 03 06 00 B5 82 02 00 02 21 00 00 H SIZE Increment BE EF 03 06 00 D3 82 04 00 02 21 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 02 83 05 00 02 21 00 00 H SIZE Reset Execute BE EF 03 06 00 68 D2 06 00 04 70 00 00 5 EF 03 06 00 91 DO 06 00 20 00 00 OFF BE EF 03 06 00 4A 72 01 00 07 22 00 00 Set TV BE EF 03 06 00 DA 73 01 00 07 22 01 00 PROGRESSIVE FILM BE EF 03 06 00 2A 73 01 00 07 22 02 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 79 72 02 00 07 22 00 00 LOW BE EF 03 06 00 26 72 01 00 06 22 01 00 Set MID BE EF 03 06 00 D6 72 01 00 06 22 02 00 VIDEONE HIGH BE EF 03 06 00 46 73 01 00 06 22 03 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 85 73 02 00 06 22 00 00 AUTO EF 03 06 00 72 01 00 04 22 00 00 RGB BE EF 03 06 00 9E 73 01 00 04 22 01 00 Set SMPTE240 EF 03 06 00 6E 73 01 00 04 22 02 00 COLOR SPACE REC709 BE EF 03 06 00 FE 72 01 00 04 22 03 00 REC601 BE EF 03 06 00 CE 70 01 00 04 22 04 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 3D 72 02 00 04 22 00 00 COMPONENT EF 03 06 00 4A D7 01 00 17 20 00 00 COMPONENT Set SCART RGB BE EF 03 06 00 DA D6 01 00 17 20 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 79 D7 02 00 17 20 00 00 AUTO BE EF 03 06 00 E6 70 01 00 12 22 0A 00 NTSC BE EF 03 06 00
124. 86 74 01 00 12 22 04 00 PAL BE EF 03 06 00 16 75 01 00 12 22 05 00 S VIDEO Set SECAM EF 03 06 00 16 70 01 00 12 22 09 00 FORMAT NTSC4 43 BE EF 03 06 00 26 77 01 00 12 22 02 00 M PAL BE EF 03 06 00 86 71 01 00 12 22 08 00 N PAL BE EF 03 06 00 76 74 01 00 12 22 07 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 75 76 02 00 12 22 00 00 continued on next page ViewSonic 209 Pro9500 Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code AUTO EF 03 06 00 A2 70 0100 11 22 0 00 5 03 06 00 274 01 00 11 22 04 00 PAL EF 03 06 00 52 75 0100 11 22 05 00 C VIDEO Set SECAM BE EF 03 06 00 52 70 01 00 11 22 09 00 FORMAT NTSC4 43 BE EF 03 06 00 62 77 01 00 11 22 02 00 M PAL BE EF 03 06 00 C2 71 01 00 11 22 08 00 N PAL BE EF 03 06 00 32 74 01 00 11 22 07 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 31 76 02 00 11 22 00 00 AUTO EF 03 06 00 77 01 00 13 22 00 00 Set VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 2A 76 01 00 13 22 01 00 HDMIFORMAT COMPUTER EF 03 06 00 DA 76 01 00 13 22 02 00 Get EF 03 06 00 89 77 02 00 13 22 00 00 AUTO BE EF 03 06 00 86 D8 01 00 22 20 00 00 Set NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00
125. 9 ENTRE PINZ N Y ALVARADO Fracc Reforma C P 91919 Tel 01 22 91 00 31 67 E Mail gacosta qplus com mx Cuernavaca Compusupport de Cuernavaca SA de CV Francisco Leyva 178 Col Miguel Hidalgo C P 62040 Cuernavaca Morelos Tel 01 777 3180579 01 777 3124014 E Mail Guadalajara Jal SERVICRECE S A de C V Av Nifios H roes 2281 Col Arcos Sur Sector Ju rez 44170 Guadalajara Jalisco Tel 01 52 33 36 15 15 43 E Mail mmiranda servicrece com Monterrey Global Product Services Mar Caribe 1987 Esquina con Golfo P rsico Fracc Bernardo Reyes CP 64280 Monterrey N L M xico Tel 8129 5103 E Mail aydeem gps1 com mx Oaxaca Oax CENTRO DE DISTRIBUCION Y SERVICIO S A de C V Murguia 708 P A Col Centro 68000 Oaxaca Tel 01 52 95 15 15 22 22 Fax 01 52 95 15 13 67 00 E Mail gpotai2001 hotmail com FOR USA SUPPORT ViewSonic Corporation 381 Brea Canyon Road Walnut CA 91789 USA Tel 800 688 6688 English 866 323 8056 Spanish Fax 1 800 685 7276 E Mail http www viewsonic com PRJ_LW03 Rev 1A 06 25 07 283 Pro9500 mos I ViewSonic
126. ASY MENU items shown in the table B EASY MENU SELECT below can be performed AUTOKEYSTONE EXECUTE l Select an item using the cursor buttons Then sS perform it according to the following table MARNE C 3 PICTURE MODE NORMAL ECO MODE NORMAL MIRROR NORMAL 18 RESET EXECUTE FILTER TIME Oh LANGUAGE ENGLISH ADVANCED MENU COMPUTERIN1 EXIT 1024 x 768 860 2 Item Description ASPECT Using the lt gt buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio See the ASPECT item in IMAGE menu Using the lt gt buttons switches the picture mode The picture modes are combinations of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP settings Choose a suitable mode according to the projected source gt NORMAL CINEMA lt gt DYNAMIC lt gt BOARD BLACK 7 DAYLIGHT lt gt WHITEBOARD lt gt GAMMA COLOR TEMP NORMAL 1 DEFAULT 2 MID CINEMA 2 DEFAULT 3LOW PICTURE MODE DYNAMIC 3 DEFAULT 1 HIGH BOARD BLACK 4 DEFAULT 4 Hi BRIGHT 1 BOARD GREEN 4 DEFAULT 5 Hi BRIGHT 2 WHITEBOARD 5 DEFAULT 2 MID Daylight Mode 6 DEFAULT 6 Hi BRIGHT 3 When the combination of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP differs from pre assigned modes above the display on the menu for the PICTURE MODE is CUSTOM Please refer to the GAMMA and COLOR TEMP items in PICTURE menu Lines or other noise might appear on the screen when this function is operated but it is not a malfunction
127. B 4 Display the menu with the MENU button Operating Guide Using the menu function 5 Use the A W lt gt buttons to go into the following menu ADVANCED MENU gt SERVICE _ COMMUNICATION STACK SERVICE COMMUNICATION ASPIRE PTT gt STACK SUB NPUT SOURCE FOLLOW MAN UNT STACK menu will appear on screen Op erating Guide OPTION menu continued on next page ViewSonic 229 Pro9500 Installation 2 2 Installing the first projector Set A Setting up Set A continued 6 Use the A Y buttons to highlight STACK STAES NODE MODE and press the button to display Ns AN the STACK MODE dialog ee Highlight SUB pressing the buttons and press the button 7 After pressing the button a dialog to ARE YOU SURE confirm whether or not to save the setting is YOU WISH TO CHANGE STACK SETTING displayed Eoo EUR Press the button to complete the setting 8 If you are using Intellectual Stack disable the remote control receiving using KEY LOCK Operating Guide OPTION menu NOTE Set A will not be operated by the remote control hereafter To avoid crosstalk when operating with the remote control it is recommended to disable the remote control receiving using KEY LOCK After the STACK MODE setting is completed Set A Sub will not be able to receive the remote control signals When STACK MODE is set to OFF enable the remote control receiving using KEY L
128. Before replacing the lamp turn the projector off and unplug the power outlet then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns as well as damaging the lamp Never unscrew except the appointed marked by an arrow screws Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from a ceiling This is dangerous since if the lamp s bulb has broken the Q shards will fall out when the cover is opened In addition working in high places is dangerous so ask your local dealer to have the lamp replaced even if the bulb is not broken Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed At the lamp replacing make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly Loose Screws could result in damage or injury Use only the lamp of the specified type Use of a lamp that does not meet the lamp specifications for this model could cause a fire damage or shorten the life of this product eb f the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used it is possible that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp If this happens consult your local dealer or a service representative Handle with care jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause it dark not to light up or to burst When the pictures appear dark or when the color tone is poor please replace the lamp as soon a
129. CEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION Pro9500 License Agreement 12 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms To do so attach the following notices to the program It
130. CULAR PURPOSE See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin St Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the library if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library Frob a library for tweaking knobs written by James Random Hacker signature of Ty gt 1 April 1990 Ty Coon President of Vice That s all there is to it This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org Copyright 1998 2008 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS
131. D2 02 00 04 30 00 00 d OFF BE EF 03 06 00 3B EF 01 00 CO 30 00 00 MyScreen Lock ON BE EF 03 06 00 AB EE 01 00 CO 30 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 08 EF 02 00 CO 30 00 00 continued on next page ViewSonic 215 Pro9500 Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code OFF BE EF 03 06 00 8F D6 01 00 17 30 00 00 MESSAGE Se ON EF 03 06 00 1F 07 01 00 17 30 01 00 Get EF 03 06 00 06 02 00 17 30 00 00 TEST PATTERN BE EF 03 06 00 43 09 01 00 22 30 00 00 DOT LINE1 BE EF 03 06 00 D3 D8 01 00 22 30 01 00 DOT LINE2 BE EF 03 06 00 23 D8 01 00 22 30 02 00 DOT LINE3 BE EF 03 06 00 B3 D9 01 00 22 30 03 00 Set DOT LINE4 BE EF 03 06 00 83 DB 01 00 22 30 04 00 TEMPLATE CIRCLE 1 EF 03 06 00 13 DA 01 00 22 30 05 00 CIRCLE 2 BE EF 03 06 00 DA 01 00 22 30 06 00 MAP 1 BE EF 03 06 00 83 D4 01 00 22 30 10 00 MAP 2 BE EF 03 06 00 13 D5 01 00 22 30 11 00 STACK BE EF 03 06 00 883 0 01 00 22 30 20 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 70 D9 02 00 22 30 00 00 OFF BE EF 03 06 00 BF D8 01 00 23 30 00 00 m On Set ON EF 03 06 00 2F D9 01 00 23 30 01 00 Get EF 03 06
132. DMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO 2 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO and the projector recognizes that it receives video signals Using the lt P gt buttons adjusts the tint Reddish lt gt Greenish This item can be selected only for a video s video and component video signal For an signal this item can also be selected if either 1 or 2 applies 1 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO 2 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO and the projector recognizes that it receives video signals continued on next page ViewSonic 37 Pro9500 Description Using the lt P gt buttons adjusts the sharpness Weak lt gt Strong There may be some noise and or the screen may flicker for a moment when an adjustment is made This is not a malfunction SHARPNESS Using the A V cursor buttons changes the active iris control mode PRESENTATION lt gt THEATER lt OFF f f PRESENTATION The active iris displays the best presentation ACTIVE IRIS image for both bright and dark scenes THEATER The active iris displays the best theater image for both bright and dark scenes OFF The active iris is always open The screen may flicker when the PRESENTATION or THEATER modes are selected If this occurs select OFF This projector has 4 memories for adjustment data for all the items of the PICTURE menu Selecting a function using the
133. Do not use other ports for image input You can input component signals to COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 You can input video signals to the Y pin of the component video of COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 NOTES for Simple Stack COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 can be used as the input port for the projector that is connected with a computer cable at its MONITOR OUT port Operating Guide SETUP menu If you wish to use other input ports input the image to Sub and Main individually Connection example in Intellectual Stack Inputting image to Sub and Main individually 1 Split the output signal from your image device into two with device such as a signal splitter 2 Connect the output ports of the image output device to the same input ports on the Main and Sub projectors NOTES for Intellectual Stack LAN USB TYPE A and USB B cannot be used as the input ports on the Main projector in Intellectual Stack NOTES for Simple Stack Any of the ports that is compatible with the signal can be used Input the same signal to the two projectors individually ViewSonic 248 Pro9500 5 Setting input ports using menu 5 1 Preparing for menu operations If Simple Stack without an RS 232C connection is used press the COMPUTER or VIDEO button on the remote control or the INPUT button on the control panel to select the port to which the cable is
134. EEE The mark indicates the requirement NOT to dispose the equipment including any spent or discarded batteries or accumulators as unsorted municipal waste but use the return and w collection systems available If the batteries accumulators and button cells included with this equipment display the chemical symbol Hg Cd or Pb then it means that the battery has a heavy metal content of more than 0 0005 Mercury or more than 0 002 Cadmium or more than 0 004 Lead This is a Class A product in European Union Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures ViewSonic i Pro9500 Important Safety Instructions 10 11 12 13 14 Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this unit near water Clean with a soft dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install the unit in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other devices including amplifiers that produce heat Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade and the third prong are provide
135. FF is selected for the MESSAGE item in the SCREEN menu and the projector will go into the FREEZE mode which the picture is frozen To exit the FREEZE mode and restore the screen to normal press the FREEZE button again e The projector automatically exits from the FREEZE mode when some control buttons are pressed e f the projector continues projecting a still image for a long time the LCD panel might possibly be burned in Do not leave the projector in the FREEZE mode for too long e Images might appear degraded when this function is operated but it is not a malfunction Temporarily blanking the screen BLANK button 1 Press BLANK button on the remote control The BLANK screen will be displayed instead of the screen of input signal Please refer to BLANK item in SCREEN menu To exit from the BLANK screen and return to the input signal screen press BLANK button again e The projector automatically exits from the BLANK mode when some control buttons are pressed NOTE sound is not connected with the BLANK screen function If necessary set the volume or mute first To display the BLANK screen and mute the sound at one time use AV MUTE function ViewSonic 31 Pro9500 Using the menu function This projector has the following menus PICTURE IMAGE INPUT SETUP AUDIO SCREEN OPTION NETWORK SECURITY and EASY MENU EASY MENU consists of functions often used and the other menus are classified into each
136. HDMI input continued on next page ViewSonic 16 Pro9500 Connecting with your devices continued Monitor Speakers AUDIO IN with an amplifier JOTO s Microphone system Wired HB 3 remote control optional USB TYPEA DC5V 0 5 REMOTE jp MONITOR OUT CONTROL F CONTROL COMPONENT NOTE If aloud feedback noise is produced from the speaker move the microphone away from the speaker Microphone function You can connect a dynamic microphone to the MIC port with a 3 5 mm mini plug In that case the built in speaker outputs the sound from the microphone even while the sound from the projector is output You can input line level signal to the MIC port from equipment such as wireless microphone Select HIGH in the MIC LEVEL item of the AUDIO menu when you input line level audio signal to the MIC port In the normal mode the volume of the microphone can be adjusted separately from the volume of the projector using the menu In the standby mode the volume of the microphone is adjustable with the VOLUME buttons on the remote control in synchronization with the volume of the projector Even when the sound of projector is set to mute mode by the AUDIO SOURCE function the volume of the microphone is adjustable In both modes standby or normal the MUTE button on the remot
137. INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com ViewSonic 278 Pro9500 License Agreement Customer Support For technical support or product service see the table below or contact your reseller Note You will need the product serial number Country Region Website T Telephone
138. IO IN1 EF 03 06 00 A2 DC 01 00 35 20 01 00 AUDIO Set AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 52 DC 01 00 35 20 02 00 SOURCE AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 C2 DD 01 00 35 20 03 00 COMPONENT OFF BE EF 03 06 00 32 DD 01 00 35 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 01 DD 02 00 35 20 00 00 AUDIO IN1 EF 03 06 00 D6 DD 01 00 32 20 01 00 AUDIO Set AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 26 DD 01 00 32 20 02 00 SOURCE AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 B6 DC 01 00 32 20 03 00 S VIDEO OFF BE EF 03 06 00 46 DC 01 00 32 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 75 DC 0200 32 20 00 00 AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 92 DD 01 00 31 20 01 00 AUDIO a AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 62 DD 01 00 31 20 02 00 SOURCE AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 F2 DC 01 00 31 20 03 00 VIDEO OFF BE EF 03 06 00 02 DC 01 00 31 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 31 DC 02 00 31 20 00 00 AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 7A DF 01 00 3F 20 01 00 AUDIO Set AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 8A DF 01 00 3F 20 02 00 SOURCE AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 DE 01 00 20 03 00 STANDBY OFF BE EF 03 06 00 EA DE 01 00 3F 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 D9 DE 02 00 20 00 00 Set 1 BE EF 03 0600 AE C6 01 00 40 20 01 00 HDMI AUDIO 2 BE EF 03 06 00 C6 01 00 40 20 02 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 0D C7 02 00 40 20 00 00 LOW BE EF 03 06 00 02 F1 01 00 A1 20 00 00 MIC LEVEL
139. ITOR OUT Set COMPUTER2 BE EF 03 06 00 BA F6 01 00 B3 20 04 00 HDMI OFF EF 03 06 00 8A B5 01 00 20 FF 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 49 F4 02 00 B3 20 00 00 COMPUTER1 BE EF 03 06 00 1A F6 01 00 BB 20 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER2 BE EF 03 06 00 DA F4 01 00 BB 20 04 00 LAN OFF BE EF 03 06 00 EA B7 01 00 BB 20 FF 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 29 F6 02 00 BB 20 00 00 COMPUTER1 BE EF 03 06 00 B6 F4 01 00 B6 20 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER2 BE EF 03 06 00 76 F6 01 00 B6 20 04 00 USB TYPEA OFF BE EF 03 06 00 46 B5 01 00 B6 20 FF 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 85 F4 02 00 B6 20 00 00 COMPUTER1 BE EF 03 06 00 6E F7 01 00 BC 20 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER2 BE EF 03 06 00 AE F5 01 00 BC 20 0400 USB TYPE B OFF BE EF 03 06 00 9E B6 01 00 BC 20 FF 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 5D F7 02 00 BC 20 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 2A F7 01 00 BF 20 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER 2 BE EF 03 06 00 EA F5 01 00 BF 20 04 00 STANDBY OFF BE EF 03 06 00 DA B6 01 00 BF 20 FF 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 19 F7 02 00 BF 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 CD CC 02 00 60 20 00 00 Increment BE EF 03 06 00 CC 04 00 60 20 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 CD 05 00 60 20 00 00 continued on next page ViewSonic 212 Pro9500 Names Operation Type Hea
140. MPUTER IN 1 is selected video signals can be input to the COMPUTER IN1 or IN2 port on the Main projector Set the port for video signal input in the COMPUTER IN menu and set the video format in the VIDEO FORMAT menu Refer to nputting image from Main to Sub and Inputting image from Main to Sub Video signal either component or video ViewSonic 242 Pro9500 STACK menu settings 3 6 Exiting Intellectual Stack menu Before exiting menu operation for Intellectual Stack it is recommended to check all the settings in the STACK menu For dialogs that are called from the STACK menu you can press the lt button to return to the STACK menu Refer to the following to exit menu operation for Intellectual Stack STACK menu SERVICE COMMUNICATION STACK When you press the lt button functioning LAMP MODE DUAL as RETURN key after performing some _ SUB INPUT SOURCE FOLLOW NAN UNIT changes to the settings a confirmation dialog will appear SERVICE COMMUNICATION STACK 5 2 ARE YOU SURE e Pressing the button functioning as YES YOU WISH STACK SETTING key in the dialog saves the setting and closes the dialog The screen becomes black while the setting is being applied Please wait for a while e Pressing the 4 button functioning as NO key in the dialog returns you to the COMMUNICATION menu without saving the setting Operating Guide OPTION menu SERVICE Dialog from STACK menu When you press
141. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat hour Configures the hour daylight savings time ends 0 23 minute Configures the minute daylight savings time ends 0 59 Week Day ViewSonic 162 Pro9500 3 8 Date Time Settings Continued Item Description Configures the time difference Set the same time difference Time difference as the one set on your computer If unsure consult your IT manager Click the ON check box to retrieve Date and Time information from the SNTP server and set the following items Configures the SNTP server address in IP format The address allows not only IP address but also domain SNTP Server Address name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network Settings The maximum length of host or domain name is up to 255 characters Configures the interval at which to retrieve Date and Time information from the SNTP server hour minute SNTP Cycle Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection by clicking the Network Restart on the main menu f you connect the projector to an existing network consult a network administrator before setting server addresses To enable the SNTP function the time difference
142. My Connection and click the Connect ction Select the Network Connection that you would like to use Wireless LAN C Wired LAN Connection Name Adapter Name If you select the My Connection the computer is connected to the projector through the network by using the profile data that is pre assigned to My Connection When you select the My Connection the computer immediately starts the connection to the projector My Connection Connect Exit Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination NOTE If the DHCP is set on in the projector the network connection between the projector and computer may not be established since IP address may be varied If you like to use the My Connection set the DHCP off in the projector If no profile data is assigned to the My Connection it can t be used Troubleshooting A network connection could not be established Windows prevented network configuration network connection could not be established changes Windows prevented network confi ration changes Please insure that you are authorized to make these changes or check your security settings You may log in the Windows under User authority Click the OK to return to the screen to select the network connection mode Consult to the network administrator and log in again under the Administrator authority After that please resume at item 1 3 2 Starting the LiveView
143. NG RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change You can do so by About the OpenSSL Toolkit permitting redistribution under these terms or alternatively under the terms of the ordinary General Public License To apply these terms attach the following notices to the library It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found one line to give the library s name and a brief idea of what it does Copyright year name of author This library is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 1 of the License or at your option any later version This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTI
144. Network Restart on the main menu If you connect the projector to an existing network consult a network administrator before setting server addresses ViewSonic 153 Pro9500 3 4 Port Settings Displays and configures communication port settings Item Description Network Control Port1 Port 23 Configures command control port 1 Port 23 Port open Click the Enable check box to use port 23 Authentication Click the Enable check box when authentication is required for this port COto Porte Configures command control port 2 Port 9715 Port 9715 Port open Click the Enable check box to use port 9715 Authentication Click the Enable check box when authentication is required for this port PJLink Port Port 4352 Configures the PJLink port Port 4352 Port open Click the Enable check box to use port 4352 Authentication Click the Enable check box when authentication is required for this port My Image Port Port 9716 Configures the My Image Port Port 9716 Port open Click the Enable check box to use port 9716 Authentication Click the Enable check box when authentication is required for this port Messenger Port Configures the Messenger Port Port 9719 Port 9719 Port open Click the Enable check box to use port 9719 Authentication Click the Enable check box when authentication is required for
145. OCK if necessary ViewSonic 230 Pro9500 Installation 2 3 Installing the second projector Set B Stacking the projectors 1 Place Set B on Set A when stacking the two projectors Make sure the heel on the bottom of Set B is inserted into the corresponding pocket on the top of Set A 2 With Set B placed on Set A push the elevator buttons of Set B to extend the elevator feet without lifting Set B Make sure the ele vator feet reach the bottom of the stack pockets on Set A 3 Rotate the elevator feet of Set B twice in the counterclockwise direction and leave a gap of about 1 mm be tween the protrusion at the bottom of Set B and the top of Set A as shown in the figure NOTE It is necessary to keep Set B slightly away from Set A except for the heel portion to prevent the two projectors from resonating due to the sound output from the built in speakers If Set B is tilt further the image of Set B may not be superimposed to the image of Set A If the elevator feet of Set A are used make sure the tilt angle for both sets is within 12 degrees from the level line Connecting projectors To use Intellectual Stack connect an RS 232C cross cable between the CONTROL port of Set A and Set B s Pu kased d ee m m ae RTS 8 RTS 5 ee CTS ViewSonic 231 Pro9500 Installation
146. OPTION AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE execute the item Then perform it according to the following table 8 EASY MENU EXIT COMPUTER IN 1 1024 x 768 860Hz Description ASPECT OVER SCAN Using the buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio For a computer signal NORMAL lt gt 4 3 lt gt 16 9 lt gt 16 10 f 4 an signal NORMAL 4 3 lt gt 16 9 lt gt 16 10 lt gt 14 9 t 4 For video signal s video signal or component video signal 4 3 16 9 gt 14 9 For an input signal from the LAN USB A or USB port or if there is no signal The NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio of the signal Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the over scan ratio Small It magnifies picture lt Large It reduces picture This item can be selected only for a video s video and component video signal For an HDMI signal this item can also be selected if either 1 or 2 applies 1 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO 2 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO and the projector recognizes that it receives video signals continued on next page ViewSonic 39 Pro9500 Description V POSITION H POSITION Using the lt P gt buttons adjusts the vertical position Down lt gt Up Over adjusting the vertical position may cause noise to appear on the screen If this occurs please reset the
147. PAL N PAL 2 Using the lt gt buttons DE ME 4 43 A S VIDEO o switches the mode for video ICE a EXIT format AUTO lt gt NTSC gt PAL gt SECAM ft N PAL M PAL lt gt NTSC4 43 7 This item is performed only for a video signal from the VIDEO port or the S VIDEO port The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode The AUTO operation may not work well for some signals If the picture becomes unstable e g an irregular picture lack of color please select the mode according to the input signal Using the A V cursor buttons switches the video format for an input from the HDMI port AUTO lt gt VIDEO lt gt COMPUTER t 4 VIDEO FORMAT Feature HDMI FORMAT AUTO automatically sets the optimum mode VIDEO sets the suitable mode for DVD signals COMPUTER sets the suitable mode for computer signals When the COMPUTER is selected the functions COLOR PICTURE menu TINT PICTURE menu and OVER SCAN IMAGE menu are unavailable Using the A V cursor buttons changes the digital range for input from the HDMI port AUTO lt gt NORMAL lt ENHANCED 4 Feature AUTO automatically sets the optimum mode NORMAL sets the suitable mode for DVD signals 16 235 ENHANCED sets the suitable mode for computer signals 0 255 If the contrast of the screen image is too strong or too weak try finding a more suitable mode
148. PUT button for 3 seconds while pressing the button on the projector The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed Ep f there is no key input for about 5 minutes while the Inquiring Code is displayed the 01 2345 6789 projector will turn off 3 2 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code Your PIN code will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed 9 0 continued on next ViewSonic 76 Pro9500 Description TRANSITION DETECTOR If this function is set to ON when the vertical angle of the projector or MIRROR setting at which the projector E is turned on is different than the previously recorded the TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm will be displayed 50084 and the projector will not display the input signal web Ya To display the signal again set this function OFF After about 5 minutes of displaying the TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm the lamp will turn off Keystone adjustment feature has been prohibited as long as the Transition Detector function is on 1 Turning on the TRANSITION DETECTOR 1 1 Use the A Y buttons the SECURITY menu to select TRANSITION DETECTOR and press the gt or the ENTER button to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu 1 2 Use the A Y buttons on the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu to select ON Select ON and the current angle and MIRROR ENTER NEW
149. Pro9500 m ADVANCED MENU 3 SELECT From the SETUP menu items shown in the table EXECUTE below can be performed KEYSTONE Select an item using the A Y cursor buttons and T OFF j press the cursor button or ENTER button to awron execute the item Then perform it according to the Foo following table EXIT COMPUTER IN 1 1024 768 60Hz Description AUTO KEYSTONE 2 KEYSTONE Selecting this item performs the Automatic keystone distortion correction Projector automatically corrects vertical keystone distortion due to the forward backward setup angle by itself This function will be executed only once when selected in the menu When the slant of the projector is changed execute this function again The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs For some input this function may not work well When V INVERT or H amp V INVERT is selected to the MIRROR item in the SETUP menu if the projector screen is inclined or angled downward this function may not work correctly When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE telephoto focus this function may be excessive This function should be used when the zoom adjustment is set to the full WIDE wide angle focus whenever possible When the projector is placed on the level about 4 this function may not work When the projector is inclined to near 30 degree or over this funct
150. R TY m en u ADVANCED MENU 3 SELECT PICTURE ENTER PASSVORD This projector is equipped with security functions EME From the SECURITY menu items shown in the table TA below can be performed Ed To use SECURITY menu User registration is required EX NETWORK before using the security functions NE Enter to the SECURITY menu CEL 1 Press the button The ENTER PASSWORD box will be displayed 2 Use the A lt gt buttons to enter the registered password The SECURITY factory default password is as follows 9500 4501 0000 This password can be changed Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER PASSWORD box and press the gt button to display the SECURITY menu P MyScreen PASSWORD OFF It is strongly recommended the factory default password to be E TRANSITION DETECTOR vr changed as soon as possible ee if d incorrect password is input the ENTER PASSWORD box 7 will be displayed again If incorrect password is input 3 times the 8 STACK LOCK OFF projector will turn off Afterwards the projector will turn off every time an incorrect password is input 3 Items shown in the table below can be performed If you have forgotten your password 1 While the ENTER PASSWORD box is displayed press and hold the RESET button on the remote control for about 3 seconds or press and hold the INPUT button for seconds while pressing the gt button on the projector 2
151. RK and use the cursor button to enter the item 5 Use the cursor buttons to select the INFORMATION and push the gt cursor button 6 The setting will be displayed in the NETWORK INFORMATION box ViewSonic 126 Pro9500 1 6 Manual configuration There are 3 options for the manual Select the manual connection method you would like to use configuration ne Profle rane Date created Profile Reno 11 30 2000 3 19 41 PM e History e Configure Network Settings Manually tee Semm name IP address Last connected If you select Configure Network Settings Projector 3 192 168 1 103 11 30 2009 3 21 24 Manually proceed to item 1 7 Configuring the egister to profile network settings manually Fen see lt Back Connect Exit 1 6 1 Profile connection Selecting a profile data connect the network with the projector It is required to store the profile data in advance New Delete 1 Select the Profile Projector name address Last connected Projector 1 192 608 1101 11 30 2009 3 23 24 PM 2 Choose a profile data listed in the window EE 209 Een Register to profile C Configure Network Settings Manually 3 Click the Connect lt Back Connect Exit 4 The network connection will be established Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination NOTE check the sett
152. S Press the button to complete the setting ViewSonic 233 Pro9500 Installation 2 4 Confirming Main and Sub settings 1 Press the MENU button on the remote control for Main Set B Main Set B Sub Set A If you press the button the dialog closes and the Main Set B menu will appear when MAIN is highlighted If you press the lt button the dialog closes and the menu will disappear NOTE If these dialogs are not displayed on screen check the RS 232C connection and the MAIN or SUB setting in the STACK MODE dialog ViewSonic 234 Pro9500 2 5 Fine adjusting image position To superimpose the images of Main Set B and Sub Set A fine adjust the im age size and position of Main Set B using PERFECT FIT For Intellectual Stack users 1 Press the MENU button on the remote control or the control panel on Main Set B to display the MENU N dialog Highlight MAIN with the buttons and press the gt button Menu on Main Set B will appear Using the 4 4 gt buttons on the remote control or the control panel on Main Set B select PERFECT FIT from EASY MENU or the SETUP menu of ADVANCED MENU Operating Guide EASY MENU or SETUP menu The image for Intellectual Stack appears on screen This image includes a TEMPLATE screen with the PERFECT FIT dialog from Main Set B and another TEMPLATE screen from Sub Set A Using PERFECT FIT on Main Set B adjust the imag
153. SITION button is pressed when a menu is indicated on screen the displayed picture does not move its position but the menu does e This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B or HDMI port ViewSonic 27 9500 Correcting the distortion To correct the distortion of projected screen you can select one of three options AUTO MANUAL and PERFECT FIT AUTO performs the automatic vertical keystone KEYSTONE correction a A MANUAL MANUAL allows you to adjust the vertical PERFECT FIT horizontal keystone PERFECT FIT allows you to adjust each of the screen corners and sides to correct the distortion First press the KEYSTONE button to display the KEYSTONE menu and point at one of items with the A buttons Then follow the procedure shown below for the item you selected NOTE menu or dialog will automatically disappear after several seconds of inactivity Pressing the KEYSTONE button again finishes the operation and closes the menu or dialog When the screen is adjusted by PERFECT FIT neither AUTO nor MANUAL is selectable If you wish to use these functions refer to step 3 in the PERFECT FIT item to initialize the adjustment of PERFECT FIT When TRANSITION DETECTOR is ON these functions are not available 2 When AUTO is pointed at pressing the or ENTER button performs automatic vertical keystone correction To close the operation press the
154. STOM EF 06 00 57 0100 A130 15 00 Get BE EF 06 00 F4 FO 02 00 A130 00 00 Off BE EF 06 00 FB 01 00 80 30 00 00 9 steps gray scale BE EF 03 06 6B 01 80 0100 Sets steps gray scale EF 03 06 00 01 00 02 00 EF 06 00 FA 01 00 80 30 03 00 Get BE EF 06 00 C8 FA 02 00 80 00 00 Get EF 06 00 08 FE 02 00 90 30 00 00 mamma Increment BE EF 03 06 00 6E 04 00 90 30 00 00 Decrement BE EF 06 00 05 00 9030 00 00 oni Execute BE EF 03 06 00 58 C2 06 00 50 70 00 00 Get EF 06 00 FA 02 00 91 00 00 Increment BE EF 06 00 92 FF 0400 9130 00 00 Decrement BE EF 06 00 43 05 00 91 00 00 Boer Samma Execute BE 03 06 00 a4 06 00 51 70 00 00 Get EF o6 BO 02 00 9230 00 00 User Samma Increment 06 D6 FF 0400 92 30 00 00 Decrement EF 03 06 00 07 FE 05 00 92 30 00 00 Bom Samma Execute 06 00 Eo 06 00 52 70 00 00 Get EF 03 06 00 4C 02 00 93 30 00 00 User Gamma Increment BE EF 03 06 00 2A FE 04 00 93 30 00 00 Decrement EF 03 06 00 FB FF
155. Sonic 149 Pro9500 3 1 Logon To use the Web Control function you need to logon with your user name and password Refer to the following for configuring or controlling the projector via a web browser Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Display the logon window as shown on the right There are two options to display this window Using the LiveViewer 4 Connect your computer and the projector via Network using the LiveViewer The server 192 168 1 10 at Web Server Authentication requires a username and password Then click the Web Control button amp on ME w Warning This server is requesting that your username and the LiveViewer main menu to sta rt the password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication We b browser so ftwa re without secure connection User name v Password Using Web browser software Remember my password Make sure that your computer and the projector is connected via network and then start Web browser Enter the projector s IP address into URL input box of the Web browser as the example below and then press the Enter key or gt button Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser and press the Enter key or click gt button 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK NOTE
156. TION menu is set to NETWORK BRIDGE all of the RS 232C commands are disabled When SAVING is selected STANDBY setting of AUDIO SOURCE is invalid and no signal is output from AUDIO OUT port in the standby mode When SAVING is selected STANDBY setting of MONITOR OUT is invalid and no signal is output from MONITOR OUT port in the standby mode While the image signal from the input port chosen in step 1 is projected the image signal from the input port selected in step 2 is output to MONITOR OUT port 1 Choose a picture input port using Y pulls Choose STANDBY to select the picture 3 output in the standby mode 2 Select one of the COMPUTER IN ports using lt gt buttons Select OFF to disable the MONITOR OUT port for the input port or standby mode chosen in the step 1 You cannot select COMPUTER IN1 in step 1 and COMPUTER IN2 in step 2 and vice versa 48 Pro9500 0019 3k PICTURE VOLUME From the AUDIO menu items shown in the table below B ees can be performed Select an item using the A V cursor c buttons and press the cursor button or the ENTER corm button to execute the item Then perform it according to the following table CONPUTERINT 1020 x 768 GEI Description Using the lt P gt buttons adjusts the volume Low lt gt High Using the A buttons turns on off the built in speaker ON OFF When OFF is selected the b
157. TRAITS ENT ERE Please confirm the specs for your projector or the signal source specs COMPUTER IN 1 continued on next page ViewSonic 98 Pro9500 Related messages continued Message Description The internal temperature is rising Please turn the power off and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes After having confirmed the following items please turn the power ON again s there blockage of the air passage aperture s the air filter dirty Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35 s the setting for FAN SPEED appropriate For details on FAN SPEED refer to FAN SPEED of SERVICE in the OPTION menu If the projector is used with a wrong setting it may cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside REMINDER A note of precaution when cleaning the air filter KERNS nS Please immediately turn the power off and clean or change LAST FILTER CHECK n the air filter referring to the Cleaning and replacing the FILTER MAINTENANCE IS ESSENTIAL filt ti f thi 1 Att h d air filter section of this manual After you have cleaned RESETISIBISR SES changed the air filter please be sure to reset the filter timer SEE MANUAL FOR FURTHER INFO TS The button operation is not available ViewSonic 99 Pro9500 Regarding the indicator lamps When operation of the LAMP TEMP and POWER indicators differs from usual check and cope with it accordin
158. U S and or other countries VESA and DDC are trademarks of the Video Electronics Standard Association HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries Trademark PJLink is a trademark applied for trademark rights in Japan the United States of America and other countries and rP Li k areas 2 In Blu ray Disc is a trademark All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners ViewSonic 1 Pro9500 Introduction 6 6 Checking the contents of 6 Pat NAMOS Em 7 Setting up 8 Arrangement uu 8 Connecting with your 9 Connecting to a power 18 Using the security bar and 18 Remote control 19 Installing the batteries 19 About the remote control 2 19 Changing the frequency of remote control signal
159. USB TYPE B USB DISPLAY BE EF 03 06 00 6F 22 01 00 50 26 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 23 02 00 50 26 00 00 LAMP TIME Get EF 03 06 00 C2 FF 02 00 90 10 00 00 LAMP TIME Execute BE EF 03 06 00 58 DC 06 00 30 70 00 00 Reset FILTER TIME Get BE EF 03 06 00 C2 F0 02 00 A0 10 00 00 disc us Execute BE EF 03 06 00 98 C6 06 00 40 70 00 00 continued on next page ViewSonic 216 Pro9500 Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code COMPUTER BE EF 03 06 00 33 01 00 00 36 00 00 COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 FA 31 01 00 00 36 04 00 LAN EF 03 06 00 34 01 00 00 36 0B 00 USB TYPEA BE EF 03 06 00 9A 30 01 00 00 36 06 00 USB TYPE B BE EF 03 06 00 3A 36 01 00 00 36 0 00 HDMI BE EF 03 06 00 CA33 01 00 00 36 03 00 COMPONENT BE EF 03 06 00 6A 30 01 00 00 36 05 00 S VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 5 32 01 00 00 36 02 00 VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 32 01 00 00 36 01 00 SLIDESHOW BE EF 03 06 00 9A 2B 01 00 00 36 22 00 MY IMAGE BE EF 03 06 00 5A 3D 01 00 00 36 16 00 Set MESSENGER BE EF 03 06 00 AA 29 01 00 00 36 25 00 My Eee INFORMATION BE EF 03 06 00 FA 01 00
160. ViewSonic Pro9500 User Guide LCD Projector Guide de l utilisateur Bedienungsanleitung Gu a del usuario Guida dell utente Guia do usu rio Anv ndarhandbok K ytt opas Podr cznik u ytkownika AFA CEPR AFS AL IMPORTANT Please read this User Guide to obtain important information on installing and using your product in a safe manner as well as registering your product for future service Warranty information contained in this User Guide will describe your limited coverage from ViewSonic Corporation which is also found on our web site at http Awww viewsonic com in English or in specific languages using the Regional selection box in the upper right corner of our website Antes de operar su equipo lea cuidadosamente las instrucciones en este manual 4 4 aa La ViewSonic Model No 513835 Compliance Information FCC Statement This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
161. a from the computer and send it out to an external device continuously The OFF is selected as the default setting 6 4 2 FULL DUPLEX This method lets the projector make two way communication transmitting and receiving data at the same time without monitoring response data from an external device With using this method the computer and an external device will send the data out of synchronization If it is required to synchronize them set the computer to make the synchronization NOTE case that the computer controls to synchronize transmitting and receiving the data it may not be able to control an external device well depending on the processing status of the projector ViewSonic 181 Pro9500 T Gtherunctions 7 1 E mail Alerts The projector can automatically send an alert message to the specified e mail addresses when the projector detects a certain condition that is requiring maintenance or detected an error NOTE Up to five e mail addresses can be specified The projector may be not able to send e mail if the projector suddenly loses power Mail Settings To use the projector s e mail alert function please configure the following items through a web browser Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Mail Settings and con
162. a that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects Reference Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect page No power is supplied to the Main and Sub projector To use the Intellectual Stack feature supply AC power to both the Main and Sub projectors If AC power is supplied to only one of the projectors Intellectual Stack is disabled The RS 232C cable between the Main and Sub projectors is not properly connected To use the Intellectual Stack feature connect an RS 232C cross cable between the Main and Sub projectors If the cable is not connected the Main projector cannot control the Sub projector The menu settings for Intellectual Stack are not performed correctly Check the settings of the STACK menu on the Main and Sub projectors To use the Intellectual Stack feature one projector must be set to Main and the other projector must be set to Sub 8 in User s Manual concise Intellectual Stack does not function Signal cables are not connected correctly Check the connection of cables Also check 46 14 that the cable connection matches with the in Operating port settings in the menu Guide The Main and The RS 232C cable between the Main and Sub projector do Sub projectors is not properly connected not operate in Connect the RS 232C cable properly and synchronization restart the Main projector 11 continued on next page ViewSonic 256 Pro9500 Troubleshooting 7
163. age or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General ViewSonic 276 Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2 instead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared then you can specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy it is irreversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the s
164. al commands show and show should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course the commands you use may be called something other than show and show they could even be mouse clicks menu items whatever suits your program You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the program if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the ViewSonic 274 program Gnomovision which makes passes at compilers written by James Hacker signature of Ty Coon 1 April 1989 Ty Coon President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License Pro9500 License Agreement GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright O 1991 1999 Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin St Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library
165. all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be torefrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable underany particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended toapply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in othercircumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or
166. ame place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it is called a work that uses the Library Such a Work in isolation is not a derivative work of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library or if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law If such an object file uses only numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessors and small macros and small inline functions ten lines or less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative wo
167. and one 1 year for the original lamp from the date of the first consumer purchase Europe except Poland Three 3 years warranty for all parts excluding the lamp three 3 years for labor and ninety 90 days for the original lamp from the date of the first consumer purchase Poland Two 2 years warranty for all parts excluding the lamp two 2 years for labor and ninety 90 days for the original lamp from the date of the first consumer purchase Limited One 1 year Heavy Usage Warranty Under heavy usage settings where a projector s use includes more than fourteen 14 hours average daily usage North and South America One 1 year warranty for all parts excluding the lamp one 1 year for labor and ninety 90 days for the original lamp from the date of the first consumer purchase Europe One 1 year warranty for all parts excluding the lamp one 1 year for labor and ninety 90 days for the original lamp from the date of the first consumer purchase Other regions or countries Please check with your local dealer or local ViewSonic office for the warranty information Lamp warranty subject to terms and conditions verification and approval Applies to manufacturer s installed lamp only All accessory lamps purchased separately are warranted for 90 days Who the warranty protects This warranty is valid only for the first consumer purchaser What the warranty does not cover 1 Any product on which the serial number has been
168. ands However the following reply will be sent back in the event of authentication failure when authentication is enabled Reply in the event of an authentication error Reply Error code Ox1F 0x04 0x00 e 9715 Send Data format The following formatting is added to the header 0 x 02 Data length 0 x OD Checksum 1 byte and Connection ID 1 byte of the RS 232C commands Header Data length RS 232Ccommand Check Sum em 0x02 0x0D 13 bytes 1 byte 1 byte Header 0x02 Fixed Data length RS 232C commands byte length OxOD Fixed RS 232C command RS 232C commands that start with OXBE OxEF 13 bytes Check Sum This is the value to make zero on the addition of the lower 8 bits from the header to the checksum Connection ID Random value from 0 to 255 This value is attached to the reply data ViewSonic 190 Pro9500 7 4 Command Control the Network Continued Reply Data format The connection ID the data is same as the connection ID data on the sending data format is attached to the RS 232C commands reply data lt reply Connection NAK reply Connection ID 1 byte Error reply Connection Error code 2 bytes Data reply Connection ID 1 byte Projector busy reply Connection ID 2 bytes 1 byte Status code Authentication error reply Authentication
169. any They will tell you what warranty condition is applied Related messages When some message appears check and cope with it according to the following table Although these messages will be automatically disappeared around several minutes it will be reappeared every time the power is turned on Message Description There is no input signal Please confirm the signal input connection and the status of the signal source The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input lt USB TYPEB 5 source even if MOUSE is selected for USB USB DISPLAY Select USB DISPLAY in the dialog to project the picture USB DISPLAY is invalid input to the USB TYPE B port In this case you cannot use IHM R the simple mouse and keyboard function Otherwise select other port for picture input Projector is waiting for an image file Check the hardware connection settings on the projector and network related settings Waiting for connection The computer Projector network connection might be s ays disconnected Please re connect using Connect button of the LiveViewer 2 1 Using the LiveViewer in the Network Guide The horizontal or vertical frequency of the input signal is COMPUTER IN not within the specified range SYNC IS OUT OF RANGE a 123kHz 123Hz Please confirm the specs for your projector or the signal source specs COMPUTER IN 1 NO INPUT 15 DETECTED An improper signal is input
170. apture before executing the following procedure 1 Selecting this item displays a dialog titled MyScreen It will ask you if You vioh to start capturing theplctue 0 you start capturing an image from the current screen Please wait for the target image to be displayed and press the ENTER or INPUT button when the image is displayed The image will freeze and the frame for capturing will appear To stop performing press the RESET button on the remote control Using the A lt gt buttons adjusts the frame position Please move the frame to the position of the image which you want to use The frame may not be able to be moved for some input signals To start registration press the ENTER or INPUT button on the remote control To restore the screen and return to the previous dialog press the RESET button on the remote control Registration may take several minutes When the registration is completed the registered screen and the following message is displayed for several seconds MyScreen registration is finished If the registration failed the following message is displayed A capturing error has occurred Please try again This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the MyScreen Lock item This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item in SECURITY menu This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B or HDMI port continu
171. asily Depending on the installation and surrounding environment images projected from the two projectors may not superimpose well enough The images cannot superimpose well enough especially when the screen is slanted deformed or the surface is uneven Images projected immediately after turning on the projectors are unstable due to rising internal temperature Wait for more than 20 minutes before starting to adjust the superimposed images The image positions may shift due to temperature change vibration or shock caused by hitting the projector Install the projectors in a stable environment when using Instant Stack If the image positions are shifted readjust the images The image positions may shift over time due to the tension and the weight of the connecting cables Make sure not to impose any load on the projectors when arranging the cables If the volume level of the built in speakers is too high the two projectors may resonate noise may occur and the image quality may deteriorate In this case check the volume setting on both projectors Lower the volume until the symptoms disappear or arrange the projectors side by side When two projectors are connected using the RS 232C cable the Main projector will be able to control the Sub projector This feature is known as Intellectual Stack When Intellectual Stack by means of RS 232C feature is used RS 232C communication cannot be used to control the projector If you wish t
172. ata on screen while you are using the USB Display function the application for the USB Display will be closed To restart the application exit the MY IMAGE function and then the software in the projector LiveViewerLiteUSB exe will run again USB Display in the Operating Guide ViewSonic 174 Pro9500 4 My Image Function Continued Configure the following items from a web browser when MY IMAGE function is used Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Port Settings on the main menu 4 Click the Enable check box to open the My Image Port Port 9716 Click the Enable check box for the Authentication setting when authentication is required otherwise clear the check box 5 Click the Apply button to save the settings eos on Port Settings 1 When the authentication setting is enabled the following settings are required 6 Click the Security Settings on the main menu 7 Select the Network Control and enter the desired authentication password 8 Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE The Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control Port1 Port 23 Network Control Port2 Port 9715 PJLink Port Port 4352 My Image Port Port 9716 and Messenger Port Port 9719
173. ayed If MAIN is selected EASY MENU or ADVANCED MENU of the Main projector is displayed When the KEYSTONE button is pressed a menu to select MAIN or SUB is displayed If MAIN is selected KEYSTONE menu of the Main projector is displayed When DUAL is selected for LAMP MODE there are operating restrictions as follows EASY MENU x SELECT POWER OFF and AGT KEYSTONE EXECUTE FREEZE functions on both cesa e KEYSTONE i projectors are disabled E 3 Picture MoE NORMAL The test patterns for CUSTOM of MIRROR em Menu to select 5 RESET EXECUTE GAMMA and COLOR TEMP are MAIN or SUB FILTERTINE 0 4 LANGUAGE ENGLISH not displayed m ADVANCED MENU COMPUTERINI EXIT 1024 x 768 860Hz It takes slightly longer time to Menu on Main projector turn on the projectors This is not ISTE a malfunction C SUB MANUAL Oem PERFECT FIT Menu to select C MAIN or SUB Menu on Main projector continued on next page ViewSonic 239 Pro9500 STACK menu settings 3 3 Selecting lamp operation mode continued NOTE When DUAL is selected for LAMP MODE the images projected from the Main and Sub projectors may be different It is recommended to set the projectors as follows Set the same image for TEMPLATE and START UP on the Main and Sub projectors Capture the same image for MyScreen on the Main and Sub projectors Save the same image on MY IMAGE on the Main and Sub projectors
174. become overcooled Filter Error Filter time over Other Error Other error If displaying this error please contact your dealer Schedule Execution Error Schedule Execution error Lamp Time Alarm Lamp time over Alarm Time setting Filter Time Alarm Filter time over Alarm Time setting Transition Detector Alarm Transition Detector Alarm SECURITY menu in the Operating Guide Cold Start When the projector is supplied with the power it works as below the STANDBY MODE is set to the NORMAL the projector s power status changes from OFF to Standby state If the STANDBY MODE is set to the SAVING the projector s power status changes from Standby state to ON lamp is turned SETUP menu in the Operating Guide Authentication Failure The SNMP access is detected from the invalid SNMP community Refer to Troubleshooting in the Operating Guide for further detailed explanation of Error except Other Error and Schedule Execution Error ViewSonic 157 Pro9500 3 6 Alert Settings Continued The Alert Items are shown below Item Description Configures the time to alert Only Lamp Time Alarm and Filter Time Alarm SNMP Trap Click the Enable check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts Alarm Time Click the Enable check box to enable e mail alerts Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure Configures the subject line of the e mai
175. brightness setting CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast setting GAMMA Selects the gamma setting COLOR TEMP Selects the color temperature setting COLOR Adjusts the color setting TINT Adjusts the tint setting SHARPNESS Adjusts the sharpness setting ACTIVE IRIS Selects the active iris setting MYMEMORY SAVE Saves the MyMemory data MYMEMORY RECALL Recalls the MyMemory data IMAGE ASPECT Selects the aspect setting OVER SCAN Adjusts the over scan setting V POSITION Adjusts the vertical position H POSITION Adjusts the horizontal position H PHASE Adjusts the horizontal phase H SIZE Adjusts the horizontal size AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE Performs the automatic adjustment INPUT PROGRESSIVE Selects the progressive setting VIDEO NR Selects the video noise reduction setting COLOR SPACE Selects the color space COMPONENT Selects the COMPONENT port setting S VIDEO FORMAT Selects the s video format setting C VIDEO FORMAT Selects the video format setting HDMI FORMAT Selects the HDMI format setting HDMI RANGE Selects the HDMI range setting COMPUTER IN1 Selects the COMPUTER IN1 input signal type COMPUTER IN2 Selects the COMPUTER IN2 input signal type FRAME LOCK COMPUTER IN1 Turns the FRAME LOCK COMPUTER IN1 function on off FRAME LOCK COMPUTER IN2 Turns the FRAME LOCK COMPUTER 2 function on off FRAME LOCK HDMI Turns the FRAME LOCK HDMI function on off
176. can be operated simultaneously to make the image brighter Moreover if you connect two projectors with RS 232C cross over cable it turns to a kind of intellectual stacking system The two projectors can work alternately by themselves and once one projector has an accident the other voluntarily starts to work to keep your presentation going These features generically called Instant Stack provide you with the broad use NOTE The information in this manual is subject to change without notice The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual The reproduction transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent Trademark acknowledgment All the trademarks in this manual are the properties of their respective owners ViewSonic 221 Pro9500 Contents 1 Introduction 223 3 STACK menu settings 236 1 1 Entries and graphical 3 1 Displaying STACK menu 236 symbols explanation 223 3 2 Selecting Main Sub or off 237 1 2 Important safety instruction avus 223 3 3 Selecting lamp operation mode 238 Instant Stack 223 3 4 Selecting lamp switching mode 241 installation E E M 225 3 5 Selecting input source for Sub 242 1 3 Basic information 3 6 Exiting Intellectual and preparations 226 Stack menu dene 243 Instant m 226 STACK MANU 243
177. check mark in the box Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings If you want to change the Network configuration to add click the Change A dialog for changing the Network configuration as shown to the right will be displayed Enter IP address and subnet mask then click the OK Procedure to connect to the projector will start Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination If you click the Cancel you will return to the dialog for adding a Network configuration If the entered IP address and projector s IP address are the same a warning dialog shown to the right will be displayed Click the OK and then enter a different IP address from the projector s one in the dialog for changing Network configuration If the connection is not available with the entered Network configuration a warning dialog shown to the right will be displayed Click the OK to return to the dialog for changing the Network configuration and then enter appropriate configuration Enter Computer IP Address and Subnet mask address Subnet mask OK Cancel An IP Address overlaps with the IP Address of the projector you are trying to connect to Please choose an IP Address that is currently not in use Incorrect IP Address NOTE Network configuration to connect to the projector has been added on the computer the added Network configuration will be erased
178. ctor to turn on If the Main projector is turned on the POWER indicator on the Main projector turns to steady green after lighting up as per normal If the Sub projector is turned on the POWER indicator on the Main projector lights in orange after the Sub projector is turned on If an error occurs on the Main projector the Sub projector turns on and the POWER indicator on the Main projector lights or blinks in red ViewSonic 240 Pro9500 STACK menu settings 3 4 Selecting lamp switching mode The following setting is necessary only when ALTERNATE is selected in the LAMP MODE dialog Select the AUTO or NORMAL lamp switching mode when using ALTERNATE 1 Highlight ALTERNATE MODE in the STACK menu with the buttons then press the gt GAME Ies button to display the ALTERNATE MODE dialog 2 Use the A Y buttons in the dialog to highlight AUTO or NORMAL AUTO Turns on the projector with the least lamp usage NORMAL Turns on the projector that was not used the previous time 3 Press the lt button to return to the previous menu or press the button to complete the setting NOTE The ALTERNATE MODE dialog can be operated on the Main projector when ALTERNATE is selected in the LAMP MODE dialog To maintain the quality and reliability of the two projectors the projector with the most lamp usage may be turned on even if AUTO is selected ViewSonic 241 Pro9500 STACK menu settings 3 5 S
179. d Prai Please re connect using amp projector is The computer Projector Connect button after zu network connection might be 9 disconnected disconnected when computer changing computer display 37 when computer display resolution is am d resolution or change display display resolution E dis lavina picture 9 resolution before connecting is changed with the LiveViewer during Network Presentation Images The compression rate being UR contain lots of used for transferring the Option menu You may 41 interference images is too high experience a drop in speed Neither transparency eI n The LiveViewer does not nor translucency M ud support these features of continued next page ViewSonic 194 Pro9500 8 Troubleshooting Continued Problem Likely Cause Things to Check Reference Page Number Others Information from the projector to computer is not correct or completed The projector does not respond Image on screen is frozen ViewSonic Communication between the projector and computer is not working well NETWORK Functions of the projector is not working well 195 Try RESTART in SERVICE menu under the NETWORK menu 70 in the Operating Guide Pro9500 Appendix ROZAS Gommunicatiom When the projector connects to the computer by RS 232C communication the projector can be controlled with RS 232C commands from the
180. d for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs Convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the unit Be sure that the power outlet is located near the unit so that it is easily accessible Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer manufacturer or sold with the unit When a cart is used use caution when Use only with the cart stand tripod bracket or table specified by the moving the cart unit combination to avoid injury from tipping over Unplug this unit when unused for long periods of time Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the unit has been damaged in any way such as if the power supply cord or plug is damaged if liquid is spilled onto or objects fall into the unit if the unit is exposed to rain or moisture or if the unit does not operate normally or has been dropped ViewSonic ii Pro9500 Declaration of RoHS Compliance This product has been designed and manufactured in compliance with Directive 2002 95 EC of the European Parliament and the Council on restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment RoHS Directive and is deemed to comply with the maximum concentration values issued by the European Technical Adaptation Committee TAC a
181. d and Connected the images on the computer are being sent to the projector The network connection to the projector is Disconnected disconnected 2 Status Display in Multi PC mode The icon is displayed at the right end of the Display mode buttons One of the following icons to inform which quarter screens are used will be shown Status Status icon No computer is on screen EJ One computer is on screen Two computers on screen EJ Three computers are on screen Four computers are screen ViewSonic 143 Pro9500 2 1 Using the LiveViewer continued 2 1 3 Switching the display mode The LiveViewer has the Single PC mode and Multi PC mode The modes can be Switched on the main menu 1 Click the button on the main menu The buttons below are displayed Status Display 2 Select from to buttons and click it Q Switching to the Single PC mode Your image is displayed on full screen Q OG Switching to the Multi PC mode Your image is displayed on a quarter screen identified in the button 3 The projector screen is switched to the mode selected above and the transmission of your computer image will be started to display your image on the screen 4 The icon zi on the main menu is replaced by the icon you selected NOTE image transm
182. de is set valid in factory default setting n addition to using the software menu on the computer on which Presenter Mode is turned on you can cancel this function by using the projector s OSD menu QUIT PRESENTER MODE EXECUTE of the PRESENTATION item in the NETWORK menu Display User Name A User that is up to 20 letters can be input by using alphanumeric characters The user name can be displayed on the projector screen so you can find out whose image is currently on the screen Refer to NETWORK menu in the Operating Guide If the check box is not marked the information is not sent to the projector ViewSonic 146 Pro9500 2 2 Starting the Network Presentation This chapter explains the Network Presentation feature with which you can project computer images transmitted through a network The LiveViewer allows you to project images from one or multiple computers by connecting the projector to an existing network without using computer cables This Network Presentation feature helps you to smoothly make your presentations and conduct conferences To start the Network Presentation select the LAN port as the input source on the projector and click the Starting Capture button on the LiveViewer 2 2 1 Display mode Two display modes Single PC mode and Multi PC mode are available for the Network Presentation 1 Single PC mode The projector displays images sent by one computer ViewSonic 147 Pro9500
183. dealer about your installation Arrangement Refer to the following tables T 1 to determine the screen size and projection distance The values shown in the table are calculated for a full size screen x Q Screen size gt Projection distance rojector top from the projector s end Screen height Projector bottom T 1 1024X768 10 4 3 16 9 Screen Projection Screen height pereen Projection Screen height size distance size distance max 5 min max inch m m m m inch cm iinch cminch m m m jinch m inch cm inch cm inch 30 0 6 0 5 0 9 34 15 57 46 18 0 0 0 7 0 4 0 9 37 16 63 44 17 6 2 40 0 8 0 6 1 2 46 2 0 77 61 240 00905 1 3 50 2 1 58 23 8 3 50 1 0 0 8 1 5 58 2 5 97 76 30 0 0 1 1 0 6 1 6 63 2 7 106 73 29 10 4 60 1 2 0 9 1 8 70 3 0 117 91 36 0 0 1 3 0 7 1 9 76 3 2 128 87 34 12 5 70 1 4 1 1 2 1 82 3 5 137 107 42 0 0 1 5 0 9 23 90 38150 102 40 15 6 80 1 6 1 2 2 4 94 4 0 157 122 440 Of 1 8 1 0 2 6 103 4 3 171 116 46 17 7 90 1 8 1 4 2 7 106 4 5 177 137 54 0 0 2 0 1 1 2 9 116 4 9 193 131 51 19 7 100 2 0 1 5 3 0 118 5 0 197 152 60 0 0122 12 3 3129 5 5 215 145 57 21 8 120 2 4 1 8 3 6 142 6 0 237 183 72 0
184. der Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code Get BE EF 03 06 00 FD CD 02 00 64 20 00 00 OMBRE Increment BE EF 03 06 00 9B CD 04 00 64 20 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 4A CC 05 00 64 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 01 CC 02 00 65 20 00 00 Sed a Increment BE EF 03 06 00 67 CC 04 00 65 20 00 00 Decrement EF 03 06 00 6 CD 05 00 65 20 00 00 VOLUME Get BE EF 03 06 00 75 CD 02 00 62 20 00 00 S VIDEO Increment EF 03 06 00 13 CD 04 00 62 20 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 C2 CC 05 00 62 20 00 00 VOLUME Get BE EF 03 06 00 31 CD 02 00 61 20 00 00 VIDEO Increment BE EF 03 06 00 57 CD 04 00 61 20 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 86 CC 05 00 61 20 00 00 Get EF 03 06 00 89 CC 02 00 63 20 00 00 VOLUME Increment EF 03 06 00 EF CC 04 00 63 20 00 00 Decrement EF 03 06 00 CD 05 00 63 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 9 02 00 6B 20 00 00 VOLUME LAN Increment BE EF 03 06 00 8F CE 04 00 6B 20 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 5E CF 05 00 6B 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 45 CC 02 00 66 20 00 00 Increment BE EF 03 06 00 23 CC 04 00 66 20 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03
185. dle East ap viewsonic com me Contact your reseller service ap viewsonic com Puerto Rico amp Virgin Islands www viewsonic com T 1 800 688 6688 English T 1 866 379 1304 Spanish F 1 909 468 3757 service us viewsonic com soporte viewsonic com Singapore Malaysia Thailand www ap viewsonic com T 65 6461 6044 service sg viewsonic com South Africa ap viewsonic com za Contact your reseller service ap viewsonic com United Kingdom www viewsoniceurope com uk www viewsoniceurope com uk support call desk service_gb viewsoniceurope com United States www viewsonic com T Toll Free 1 800 688 6688 T Toll 1 424 233 2530 F 1 909 468 3757 service us viewsonic com ViewSonic 279 Pro9500 Limited Warranty VIEWSONIC PROJECTOR What the warranty covers ViewSonic warrants its products to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use during the warranty period If a product proves to be defective in material or workmanship during the warranty period ViewSonic will at its sole option repair or replace the product with a like product Replacement product or parts may include remanufactured or refurbished parts or components Limited Three 3 year General Warranty Subject to the more limited one 1 year warranty set out below North and South America Three 3 years warranty for all parts excluding the lamp three 3 years for labor
186. dress but also domain SMTP Server Address name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network Settings The maximum length of host or domain name is up to 255 characters Configures the sender e mail address Sender E mail address The length of the sender e mail address can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters Configures the e mail address of up to five recipients You can also specify the TO or CC for each address The length of the recipient e mail address can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters Recipient E mail address Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE You can confirm whether the mail settings work correctly using the Send Test Mail button Please enable Send mail setting before clicking the Send Test Mail If you connect the projector to an existing network consult a network administrator before setting server addresses ViewSonic 156 Pro9500 Displays and configures failure amp alert settings Item Description Cover Error The lamp cover has not been properly fixed Fan Error The cooling fan is not operating Lamp Error The lamp does not light and there is a possibility that interior portion has become heated Temp Error There is a possibility that the interior portion has become heated Air Flow Error The internal temperature is rising Cold Error There is a possibility that the interior portion has
187. ds and send the data Send e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde command 6 When the sending data is correct the command will be performed and the reply data will be returned Otherwise an authentication error will be returned NOTE As for the transmission of the second or subsequent commands the authentication data can be omitted when the same connection ViewSonic 202 Pro9500 NetworktBnridge Communication This projector is equipped with NETWORK BRIDGE function When the projector connects to the computer by LAN communicaton an external device that is connected with this projector by RS 232C communication can be controlled from the computer as a network terminal For details see the 6 Network Bridge unction in the Network Guide Connection 1 Connect the computer s LAN port and the projector s LAN port with a LAN cable 2 Connect the projectors CONTROL port and the RS 232C port of the devices that you want to control with RS 232C cable 3 Turn the computer on and after the computer has started up turn the projector on Set the COMMUNICATION TYPE to NETWORK BRIDGE OPTION menu SERVICE COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide ViewSonic 203 Pro9500 Communication settings For communication setting use the OPTION SERVICE COMMUNICATION menu OPTION menu SERVICE COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide Item Conditi
188. e DHCP setting changes to ON it guratton takes a little time to obtain IP address from DHCP server Auto IP function will be assigned an IP address if the projector could not obtain an IP address from server even if DHCP is ON Protocol continued on next page ViewSonic 67 Pro9500 Description Use the 4 4 gt buttons to enter the IP ADDRESS This function can only be used when DHCP is set to OFF IP ADDRESS The IP ADDRESS is the number that identifies this projector on the network You cannot have two devices with the same IP ADDRESS on the same network The IP ADDRESS 0 0 0 0 is prohibited Use the 4 buttons to enter the same SUBNET MASK used by your computer SUBNET This function can only be used when DHCP is set MASK to OFF The SUBNET MASK 0 0 0 0 is prohibited Use the A lt P buttons to enter the DEFAULT GATEWAY a node on a computer network that DEFAULT serves as an access point to another network GATEWAY address I This function can only be used when DHCP is set continued to OFF Use the A lt gt buttons to input the DNS server address The DNS server is a system to control domain names and IP addresses on the Network DNS SERVER Use the A V buttons to enter the TIME DIFFERENCE TIME Set the same TIME DIFFERENCE as the one DIFFERENCE set on your computer If unsure consult your IT manager Use the gt button to
189. e control works on the sounds of the microphone and the projector This projector doesn t support plug in power for the microphone ViewSonic 17 Pro9500 Connecting to a power supply 1 Put the connector of the power cord into the AC IN AC inlet of the projector 2 Firmly plug the power cord s plug into the outlet In a couple of seconds after the power supply connection the POWER indicator will light up in steady orange Please remember that when the DIRECT POWER ON function activated the connection of the power supply make the projector turn on li m cord AWARNING p Please use extra caution when connecting the power cord as incorrect or faulty connections may result in fire and or electrical shock Only use the power cord that came with the projector If it is damaged consult your dealer to get a new one Only plug the power cord into an outlet whose voltage is matched to the power cord The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible Remove the power cord for complete separation Never modify the power cord I Anti theft chain or wire Using the security bar and slot A commercially available anti theft chain or wire can be attached to the security bar on the projector Refer to the figure to choose an anti theft chain or wire Also this product has the security slot for the Kensington lock For details see the manual of the security tool ply
190. e cursor to the OK on screen and press the gt ENTER or INPUT button To revert to the previous PROJECTOR NAME without saving changes move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and press the lt ENTER or INPUT button continued on next page ViewSonic 69 Pro9500 Description MY IMAGE AMX D D AMX Device Discovery Selecting this item displays the MY WY IMAGE IMAGE menu mu PRESENTATIONFILE To store images in the projector the DEVONSTRATION GS application software PJlmg Projector 6 MO Image Tool that can be downloaded from our website is required Use the buttons to select an item which is a still image by the MY IMAGE 4 My Image Function in the Network Guide and the gt or ENTER button to display the image The item without image stored cannot be selected The image names are each displayed in 16 characters or less To switch the image displayed Use the A Y buttons To return to the menu Press the 4 button on the remote control To erase the image displayed and its source file in the projector 1 Press the RESET button on the remote control while displaying an MY IMAGE image to display the MY IMAGE DELETE IMAGE 1 DELETE menu 2 Press the button to perform to erase To stop erasing press the 4 button Use the A V buttons to turn the AMX Device Discovery on off ON OFF When ON is selected the projector can be detected by controllers of AMX connec
191. e from the projector Method 1 1 Turn on the projector and make sure that the projector image is on screen 2 Press the COMPUTER button on the remote control or INPUT button on the projector to select the LAN as input port If there is no signal on the LAN port you can find the Passcode on screen ViewSonic 119 Pro9500 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued Method 2 1 Turn on the projector and make sure that the projector image is on screen 2 Press the MENU button on the remote control or the A Y buttons on the projector to show the menu on screen 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the ADVANCED MENU and use the gt cursor button to enter the item 4 Use the A cursor buttons to select the NETWORK and use the cursor button to enter the item 5 Use the A Y cursor buttons to select the INFORMATION and use the gt cursor button to display the INFORMATION 6 The Passcode appears in the INFORMATION window NOTE Take the method 2 when you project your computer image by the LiveViewer or when the LAN port is not selected as input source If no communication between the projector and computer in 5 minutes the Passcode will be changed ViewSonic 120 Pro9500 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued 2 Entering the Passcode Projector Connection If you select Enter PassCode at item 1 5 passcooe wa the Please enter the PassCode screen is
192. e guaranteed when the projector receives an undefined command or data Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any other code The projector outputs test data when the power supply is switched ON and when the lamp is lit Ignore this data Commands are not accepted during warm up When the data length is greater than indicated by the data length code the projector ignore the excess data code Conversely when the data length is shorter than indicated by the data length code the projector returns the error code to the computer ViewSonic 198 Pro9500 Wire wave When the projector connects network the projector can be controlled with RS 232C commands from the computer with web browser For details of RS 232C commands refer to RS 232C Communication Network command table Connection 1 Turn off the projector and the computer 2 Connect the projector s LAN port and the computer s LAN port with a LAN cable Use the cable that fulfills the specification shown in figure Use CAT 5 or greater LAN Cable when LAN ports are used 3 Turn the computer on and after the computer has started up turn the projector on LAN cable CAT 5 or greater eo ON M p ViewSonic 199 Pro9500 Communicaion Port The following two ports are assigned for the command control 23 9715 Configure the f
193. e items shown in the table below can be performed using the Projector Control menu Click the Quit Presenter Mode Item Description SERVICE Quit Presenter Mode Quit compulsorily from the Presenter mode ViewSonic 170 Pro9500 3 11 Remote Control You can use your Web browser to control the projector Do not attempt to control the projector with the projector s remote control and via your Web browser at the same time It may cause some operational errors in the projector The functions on the bundled remote control are assigned to the Web Remote Control screen Item Description POWER Assigned the same operation as STANDBY ON button COMPUTER Assigned the same operation as COMPUTER button VIDEO Assigned the same operation as VIDEO button BLANK Assigned the same operation as BLANK button FREEZE Assigned the same operation as FREEZE button MUTE Assigned the same operation as MUTE button MENU Assigned the same operation as MENU button Assigned the same operation as A button Assigned the same operation as Y button Assigned the same operation as 4 button Assigned the same operation as button ENTER Assigned the same operation as ENTER button RESET Assigned the same operation as RESET button PAGE UP Assigned the same operation as PAGE UP button PAGE DOWN Assigned the same operation as PAGE DOWN button SLIDESHOW Starts the Slideshow
194. e leakage out Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery Do not work on a battery for example recharging or soldering Keep a battery in a dark cool and dry place Never expose a battery to a fire or water Keep a battery away from children and pets Be careful for them not to swallow a battery If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment Obey the local laws on disposing a battery ViewSonic 96 Pro9500 Other care Inside of the projector In order to ensure the safe use of your projector please have it cleaned and inspected by your dealer about once every year Caring for the lens If the lens is flawed soiled or fogged it could cause deterioration of display quality Please take care of the lens being cautious of handling 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow the projector to cool sufficiently 2 After making sure that the projector is cool adequately lightly wipe the lens with a commercially available lens cleaning wipe Do not touch the lens directly with your hand Caring for the cabinet and remote control Incorrect care could have adverse influence such as discoloration peeling paint etc 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow the projector to cool sufficiently 2 After making sure that the projector is cool adequately lightly wipe with gauze or a soft cloth If the projector is ex
195. e program that uses the Library does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Library and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The modified work must itself be a software library b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change C You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License d If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that in the event an application does not supply such func
196. e size and position of Main Set B to superimpose well to the image of Sub Set A Operating Guide EASY MENU or OPTION menu It is recommended to adjust in the following ways 1 Roughly adjust the four corners in the order below Top left Top right Bottom right Bottom left 2 Fine adjust the four corners in the same Way Installation Main Set B ET al B EE ZI Image from Main Set B Image from Sub Set A uu Superimposed image m NOTE Refer to NOTES for all users ViewSonic 235 Pro9500 Installation For Simple Stack users 1 Press the MENU button on the remote control to display the menu on Set A 2 Use the 4 4 gt buttons to open the TEMPLATE dialog then select STACK on the dialog Operating Guide SCREEN menu 3 Press the MENU button on the control panel of Set B to display the menu 4 Use the 4 4 gt buttons to select CEEHSENCEDETETUEEEUGEE gt PERFECT FIT from EASY MENU or the SETUP menu of ADVANCED MENU Operat m E ing Guide EASY MENU or SETUP menu PERFECT FIT dialog appears on screen 2222 5 Using PERFECT FIT on Set B adjust the im age size and position of Set B to superimpose well to the image of Set A It is recommended
197. e software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term ViewSonic USA 272 is not allowed modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distrib
198. e to consult your dealer beforehand gt Do not install the projector near thermally conductive or flammable things Such things when heated by the projector could result in a fire and burns Do not place the projector on a metal stand gt Do not place the projector where any oils such as cooking or machine oil are used Oil may harm the product resulting in malfunction or falling from the mounted position gt Do not place the projector in a place where it may get wet Getting the projector wet or inserting liquid into the projector could cause a fire and an electric shock and damage the projector Do not place the projector near water such as in a bathroom kitchen or poolside Do not place the projector outdoors or by the window Do not place anything containing liquid near the projector continued on next page ViewSonic 11 Pro9500 Arrangement continued ANCAUTION Place the projector in a cool place with sufficient ventilation The projector may shutdown automatically or may malfunction if its internal temperature is too high Using a damaged projector could result in a fire and an electric shock Do not place the projector in direct sunlight or near hot objects such as heaters Keep a space of 30 cm or more between a side of the projector and other objects such as walls Do not place the projector on carpet cushions or bedding Do not stop up block nor cover the projector s vent hole
199. ected input sources other than COMPUTER IN1 and COMPUTER IN2 cannot be selected When FIXED COMPUTER IN 1 is selected if any button for setting the input ports including COMPUTER VIDEO MY SOURCE DOC CAMERA and MY BUTTON assigned with input source related functions buttons on the remote control and the INPUT button on the projector is pressed the dialog for selecting the input source will be displayed ViewSonic 251 Pro9500 Setting input ports using menu Inputting image from Main to Sub Video signal either component or video 1 If the STACK menu is already displayed on the screen proceed to 3 below Otherwise press the MENU button on the remote control If the MENU dialog is displayed use the buttons to highlight MAIN and press the button A menu will be displayed If the MENU dialog is not displayed the STACK menu will appear 2 Press the MENU button on the remote control 50 or control panel on the Main projector Use the E 4 gt buttons to open the COMPUTER IN dialog Operating Guide INPUT menu 3 To input component signals to COMPUTER 1 or IN2 set the port to AUTO Then use the lt gt buttons to highlight EXIT and press the button to complete the setting To input video signals to COMPUTER IN1 or IN2 set the port to VIDEO If it is necessary to select a video format use the A lt P buttons to highlight RETURN and press the lt button to d
200. ection there is no restriction on the func tions Regardless of whether Intellectual Stack or Simple Stack is used take note of the Schedule settings before using the Stack function Unexpected setting changes may occur when using the Stack function Refer to the following for the restrictions concerning Intellectual Stack If you are using Simple Stack skip this chapter Restrictions on the Main projector LAMP MODE DUAL Functions sid ATERNATE ALTERNATE Power ON ON OFF ON status ON yx Restrictions on the Sub projector LAMP MODE DUAL Functions odis ALTERNATE ALTERNATE Power FF status ON ON X 3 X 3 This Schedule can be input to Web Control and be executed even if the projectors are operating in Intellectual Stack 1 This Schedule can be input to Web Control even if the projectors are continued on next page ViewSonic 254 Pro9500 Restrictions on Schedule function 6 Restrictions on Schedule function continued operating in Intellectual Stack If the input port to be changed according to the Schedule function can be used in Intellectual Stack the Schedule will be executed If not it will not be executed X 2 This Schedule can be input to Web Control when the projectors operating in Intellectual Stack but it will not be executed X 3 This Schedule can neither be input to Web Control nor be executed when the projectors are operating in In
201. ed MyScreen image from being overwritten 1 Turning on the MyScreen PASSWORD 1 1 Use the A Y buttons on the SECURITY menu to MyScreen PASSWORD select MyScreen PASSWORD and press the gt ON button to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on RETURN D YEXIT off menu 1 2 Use the A Y buttons on the MyScreen E MyScreen PASSWORD PASSWORD on off menu to select ON ENTER NEW PASSWORD The ENTER NEW PASSWORD box small naci will be displayed ENTER NEW PASSWORD 1 3 Use the A Y lt p buttons to enter the box small password Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box small VENESSORERGUN and press the button to display the NEW 0000 PASSWORD AGAIN box enter the same PASSWORD again 1 4 Move the cursor to the right side of the eee NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press ana the gt button to display the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds please make note of the password during this time Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or button on the projector will return to MyScreen PASSWORD on off menu When a password is set for MyScreen The MyScreen registration function and menu will be unavailable The MyScreen Lock menu will be unavailable The START UP setting will be locked on MyScreen and the menu will be unavailable Turning the MyScreen PASSWORD off will allow normal operation of these functions Please do not forget your MyScreen PASSWORD 2 Turning off the MyScre
202. ed on next page ViewSonic 52 Pro9500 Description Using the A V buttons turns on off the MyScreen lock function ON OFF When the ON is selected the item MyScreen is locked Use this function for protecting the current MyScreen This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item in SECURITY menu Using the A V buttons turns on off the message function ON lt gt OFF When the ON is selected the following message function works AUTO IN PROGRESS while automatically adjusting NO INPUT IS DETECTED SYNC IS OUT OF RANGE INVALID SCAN FREQ Searching while searching for the input Detecting while an input signal is detected AUTO ECO MODE while starting up with AUTO ECO MODE The indication of the input signal displayed by changing The indication of the aspect ratio displayed by changing The indication of the PICTURE MODE displayed by changing The indication of the ACTIVE IRIS displayed by changing The indication of the MY MEMORY displayed by changing The indication of FREEZE and II while freezing the screen by pressing the FREEZE button The indication of the TEMPLATE displayed by changing When the OFF is selected please remember if the picture is frozen Do not mistake freezing for a malfunction MyScreen Lock continued on next page ViewSonic 53 Pro9500 Description Each input port for this projector can have a name applied to it 1 Use the
203. egge applicabile ViewSonic 262 Pro9500 ITALI ANO Avtale sluttbrukerlisens for projektorens programvare Programvaren i projektoren best r av flere uavhengige programvaremoduler og v re opphavsrettigheter og eller tredjeparts opphavsrettigheter finnes for hver slik programvaremodul Projektoren bruker ogs programvaremoduler som vi har utviklet og eller laget Og v re opphavsrettigheter og ndsverk for hver slik programvare og relaterte enheter inkludert men ikke begrenset til programvarerelaterte dokumenter finnes Rettighetene over er beskyttet av lover om opphavsrettighet og andre tilgiengelige lover Og projektoren bruker programvaremoduler som er lisensiert under GNU General Public Lisence Version 2 og GNU Lesser General Public Version 2 1 etablert av Free Software Foundation inc U S A eller lisensavtaler for hver programvare Se den felgende websiden for lisensavtaler for slike programvaremoduler og annen programvare Webadresse http www viewsonic com products pro9500 htm Kontakt din forhandler for innspill ang ende lisensiert programvare Se lisensavtalene for hver programvare i de f lgende sidene og lisensavtalene for hver programvare websiden for detaljer om lisensforholdene og s videre Ettersom de felgende lisensavtalene er etablert av en tredjepart er de oppgitt originalspr ket engelsk Fordi programmet Programvaremodulen er lisensiert gratis er programmet utgitt uten noen garanti e
204. el 4 The channel data may vary depending on the content Some channel might be used for secondary language or empty 56 Pro9500 ORON m ADVANCED MENU 3 SELECT From the OPTION menu items shown in the table c 7 below can be performed Select an item using the cursor buttons and DU press the cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item except for the items LAMP TIME and FILTER Eem m e TIME Then perform it according to the following table GONPUTER INT 1024 x 768 Description Using the A V buttons turns on off the automatic signal search function ON amp OFF When the ON is selected detecting no signal automatically cycles through input ports in the following order The search is started from AUTO SEARCH the current port Then when an input is found the projector will stop searching and display the image E COMPUTER IN1 gt COMPUTER 2 gt LAN gt USB VIDEO lt S VIDEO lt COMPONENT HDMI USB TYPE B It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port Using the A Y buttons turns on off the automatic keystone function ON OFF ON Automatic keystone distortion correction will be executed whenever changing the slant of the projector AUTO OFF This function is disabled Please execute the AUTO KEYSTONE KEYSTONE EXECUTE in the SETUP menu for automatic keystone dis
205. electing input source for Sub 1 Highlight SUB INPUT SOURCE in the STACK SUB SOURCE menu with the buttons then press the gt pe button to display the SUB INPUT SOURCE dialog 2 Use the A Y buttons in the dialog to highlight FOLLOW MAIN UNIT or FIXED COMPUTER IN 1 FOLLOW MAIN UNIT Sets the input source on the Sub projector to the same port as Main FIXED COMPUTER IN 1 Sets the input source on the Sub projector to the COMPUTER IN1 port which is connected to the MONITOR OUT port on the Main projector 3 Press the lt button to return to the previous menu or press the button to complete the setting NOTE If FIXED COMPUTER IN 1 is selected either the COMPUTER IN1 or IN2 port can be selected as an input source on the Main projector When the COMPUTER or VIDEO button on the remote control or the INPUT button on the projector is pressed the MAIN INPUT SOURCE dialog will be displayed on screen Select COMPUTER IN 1 or COMPUTER IN 2 with the A Y buttons IF FIXED COMPUTER IN 1 is selected the COMPUTER IN1 port on the Sub projector should be connected to the MONITOR OUT port on the Main projector with a computer cable The image from the selected port is output from the MONITOR OUT port on the Main projector to the COMPUTER IN1 port on the Sub projector The MONITOR OUT setting on the Main projector is disabled when FIXED COMPUTER IN 1 is selected Operating Guide gt SETUP menu If FIXED CO
206. en 117 1 6 Manual Configuration sss emen 127 1 61 Profile GOD IG CHIODT 255 2 eta Ett eR cni Eb aO Dr nies Ehe ki conte masqa Eme RR 127 1 62 History connectlOD t meten ree t n dese n ci etu sabun 128 1 7 Configuring the network settings manually 129 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 134 1 8 1 Connection and transmission rri t ncn 134 1 8 2 Connection P M 136 137 1 9 PROMO rss 137 1 9 2 MakirigiP roris A 137 1 9 Profile data sesi nan ae i ne c 138 1 9 4 8 ruere cire xe it ere Al 139 2 Network Presentation 1 141 2 1 Using the Live View uyaq ii patto eta E ptt Y Y nad Yu sd A 141 21 1 Maitiimenu and Operating DUMONS uA ur e enam ce cepere co iia iic 141 2 1 2 Displaying 143 2 1 3 Switching thedisplay MOJE neat cn dana c RU eu LG 144 2 1 4 Option men s cess cic cot cete orat ee oer ev oU bte 145 2 2 Starting the Network Presentation 147 2 2
207. en Lock MESSAGE SOURCE NAME TEMPLATE C c OPTION 57 AUTO SEARCH AUTO KEYSTONE DIRECT POWER ON AUTO POWER OFF USB B LAMP TIME FILTER TIME Mv BUTTON My source SERVICE NETWORK mendi us Anaia 67 SETUP PROJECTOR NAME My IMAGE AMX D D PRESENTATION INFORMATION SERVICE SECURITY 74 SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE MYSCREEN PASSWORD PIN LOCK TRANSITION DETECTOR My TEXT PASSWORD My TEXT DISPLAY My TEXT WRITING SECURITY INDICATOR STACK LOCK Presentation tools 80 PC LESS Presentation 80 Thumbnail Mode Full Screen Mode Slideshow mode Playlist USB Display z uu ee D Ure ha ierant tesi 89 Right Click menu Floating menu Options window Maintenance 92 Replacing TS LAMP c 92 Cleaning and replacing the air 94 Replacing the internal clock battery 96 Other EE EE X T 97 Troubleshooting 98 I
208. en PASSWORD 2 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on off menu 2 MyScreen PASSWORD 2 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large Enter the registered Jina DL23456789 2 password and the screen will return to the paro i MyScreen PASSWORD on off menu ENTER PASSWORD box If an incorrect PASSWORD is input the menu will arge close If necessary repeat the process from 2 1 3 If you have forgotten your password 3 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on off menu 3 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the box 3 3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code Your password will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed continued on next page ViewSonic 75 Pro9500 Description PIN LOCK PIN LOCK is a function which prevents the projector from being used unless a registered Code is input 1 Turning on the PIN LOCK 1 1 Use the A Y buttons on the SECURITY menu to PIN LOCK select PIN LOCK and press the gt button or the ENTER button to display the LOCK on off menu 1 2 Use the A Y buttons on the PIN LOCK on PIN BOX off menu to select ON and the Enter PIN Eni Ne Code box will be displayed 1 3 Input a 4 part PIN code using the A W lt gt COMPUTER or INPUT button PIN Code again box
209. en or not supported format A file that cannot be displayed on the thumbnail screen is indicated by a file format icon ViewSonic 84 Pro9500 PC LESS Presentation continued Full Screen Mode The Full Screen mode shows a full display image To display in Full Screen mode select an image in the Thumbnail screen Then press the ENTER button on the remote control or the INPUT button on the keypad or click ENTER on the Web Remote Control Full screen display The following functions can be supported in the Full Screen mode Button operation The keypad Web Remote on the in web browser projector software Y Y gt T Gr or or Shows the next picture PAGE DOWN di PAGE DOWN A A A 4 4 Shows the previous picture PAGEUP PAGE UP ENTER ENTER Displays Thumbnail The remote Functions control NOTE These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed t is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the Thumbnail screen Slideshow or Full Screen is displayed ViewSonic 85 Pro9500 PC LESS Presentation continued Slideshow mode The Slideshow mode displays images in full screen and switches the images at intervals set in INTERVAL on the Thumbnail screen menu You can start this function from the Slideshow menu To display the Slideshow menu select the SLIDESHOW button in the Thumbnail mode and pres
210. ent EF 03 06 00 67 88 04 00 25 21 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 B6 89 05 00 25 21 00 00 Get EF 03 06 00 45 88 02 00 26 21 00 00 M Increment EF 03 06 00 23 88 04 00 26 21 00 00 Decrement EF 03 06 00 F2 89 05 00 26 21 00 00 Get EF 03 06 00 B9 89 02 00 27 21 00 00 22 Increment BE EF 03 06 00 DF 89 04 00 27 21 00 00 9 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 OE 88 05 00 27 21 00 00 Get EF 03 06 00 AD 8A 02 00 28 21 00 00 1 Increment EF 03 06 00 CB 8A 04 00 28 21 00 00 9 Decrement EF 03 06 00 1A 8B 05 00 28 21 00 00 PERFECT FIT Execute BE EF 03 06 00 D5 8A 06 00 29 21 00 00 All Corners Reset PERFECT FIT Get EF 03 06 00 31 97 0200 41 21 00 00 Left Side Increment BE EF 03 06 00 57 97 04 00 41 21 00 00 Distortion Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 86 96 05 00 41 21 00 00 PERFECT FIT Get EF 03 06 00 75 97 02 00 42 21 00 00 Right Side Increment BE EF 03 06 00 13 97 04 00 42 21 00 00 Distortion Decrement EF 03 06 00 C2 96 05 00 42 21 00 00 PERFECT FIT Get EF 03 06 00 89 96 02 00 43 21 00 00 Distortion Increment BE EF 03 06 00 EF 96 04 00 43 21 00 00 Position V Decrement EF 03 06 00 97 05 00 43 21 00 00 PERFECT FIT Get EF 03 06 00 FD 97 02 00 44 21 00 00 Top Side Increment BE EF 03 06 00 9B 97
211. ent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or s
212. entication setting when authentication is required otherwise clear the check box 5 Click the Enable check box to open Network Control Port2 Port 9715 to use TCP 9715 Click the Enable check box for the Authentication setting when authentication is required otherwise clear the check box 6 Click the Apply button to save the settings ViewSonic 188 Pro9500 7 4 Command Control the Network Continued When the authentication setting is enabled the following settings are required 7 Click the Security Settings on the main menu 8 Click the Network Control and enter the desired authentication password See NOTE 9 Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE The Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control Port1 Port 23 Network Control Port2 Port 9715 PJLink Port Port 4352 My Image Port Port 9716 and Messenger Port Port 9719 The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection by clicking the Network Restart on the main menu ViewSonic 189 Pro9500 7 4 Command Control the Network Continued Command Format Command formats differ among the different communication ports e 23 You can use the RS 232C commands without any changes The reply data format is the same as the RS 232C comm
213. er ViewSonic 116 Pro9500 1 4 Selecting the network connection mode continued Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector The message is appeared when the wireless adapter you selected is already used for another network connection Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector To connect click the Yes Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination Not to connect click the No to return to the screen to select the network connection mode ViewSonic 117 Pro9500 1 5 Selecting the network connection method There are some options to connect to the Select the option that describes the connection method you would network Wetue Enter PassCode Enter PassCode Configure Manually ENTRE Paires Select From List Select one of them to meet your requirement find The PassCade is 12 digit code that can be found on the Startup Screen of the projector you are currently trying to connect to lt Back Net Exit Enter PassCode If you want to use the Passcode for network connection select the Enter PassCode and click the Next The Passcode is given by the projector on screen And you simply input the Passcode to the LiveViewer to connect the network Proceed to item 1 5 1 Passcode connection Configure Manually Select the Configure Manually and click the Next Then proceed to item 1 6 Manual Configura
214. er in your computer taking one of the followings e Double click the LiveViewer icon on the Desktop in your computer e Select Start All Programs Projector Tools LiveViewer Windows menu Then proceed to item 1 4 Selecting the network connection mode ViewSonic 113 Pro9500 1 4 Selecting the network connection mode After starting the LiveViewer the Select the Select the Network Connection that you would to use Network Connection screen comes up Wireless LAN Select the network connection that you would like Sak 25 to use There are options in the menu Wireless Network Connec 11ab g Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express Wireless LAN E Wired LAN u My Connection Next gt Exit If you select either the wireless LAN or wired LAN proceed to item 1 4 1 Selecting either the wireless LAN or wired LAN If you select My Connection jump to item 1 4 2 Selecting My Connection NOTE Select Wireless LAN only when you connect the computer and the access point via wireless network and connect the access point and the projector via wired network since the projector doesn t have wireless LAN function 1 4 1 Selecting either the wireless LAN or wired LAN If you select either the wireless LAN or wired LAN lect Network Connection that to a list of the network adapters your computer is ee shown in the menu Select what you like t
215. er program whose authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this fre
216. eren Programmen durch die betreffende Software und oder die Verwendung der betreffenden Software aus ViewSonic 260 Pro9500 DEU TSCH Acuerdo de licencia de usuario final para el software del proyector El software incluido en el proyector consta del numero plural de m dulos de software independientes y contamos con nuestro derecho de reproducci n y o los derechos de reproducci n de terceros para cada uno de los m dulos del software El proyector tambi n utiliza m dulos de software que hemos desarrollado y o producido Contamos con derechos de reproducci n y propiedad intelectual para cada uno de los software y elementos relacionados incluidos a t tulo de ejemplo los documentos relacionados con el software Los derechos de arriba est n protegidos por la ley de derechos de reproducci n y otras leyes aplicables Y el proyector utiliza m dulos de software con licencia como freeware en la GNU General Public License Version 2 y la GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 establecida por Free Software Foundation Inc EE UU o acuerdos de licencia para cada software Consulte los acuerdos de licencia de dichos m dulos de software y otro software en la siguiente p gina Web Direcci n de la p gina Web http www viewsonic com products pro9500 htm Si tiene alguna duda sobre el software otorgado bajo licencia p ngase en contacto con su distribuidor Para conocer los detalles de las condiciones de licencia y otras cosas
217. espond to the remote control signals until STACK MODE on either projector is set to SUB During installation it is recommended to operate one projector with the remote control and the other with the control panel on the projector or a wired remote control In this case disable the remote control receiving on the other projector with the KEY LOCK feature Operating Guide OPTION menu e Images from Set A and Set B may superimpose well but the image positions can shift over time Readjust to superimpose the images e If the volume level of the built in speakers is too high the two projectors may resonate noise may occur and the image quality may deteriorate In this case check the volume setting on both projectors Lower the volume until the symptoms disappear or arrange the projectors side by side If the image positions are shifted readjust 2 1 Preparing for Intellectual Stack When using Intellectual Stack via RS 232C connection ensure the following set tings are set on the two projectors Otherwise the Intellectual Stack menu cannot be operated e STANDBY MODE in SETUP menu NORMAL Operating Guide SETUP menu e COMMUNICATION TYPE under COMMUNICATION in SERVICE menu OFF Operating Guide OPTION menu e STACK LOCK in SECURITY menu OFF When STACK LOCK is set to on menus related to Instant Stack cannot be operated It is therefore necessary to set it to off during installation and menu setting 1 Use the 4 gt
218. eters for My Image data display Messenger Configures the parameters for Messenger data display Slideshow Configures the Start Stop parameters for the Slideshow Configures the commands to be executed Click the Register button to add new commands to the schedule list Click the Delete button to delete commands from the schedule list Click the Reset button to delete all commands and reset the schedule settings from the schedule list ViewSonic 160 Pro9500 3 7 Schedule Settings Continued NOTE After the projector is moved check the date and time set for the projector before configuring the schedules Strong shock may make the date and time settings get out of tune Events My Image and Messenger will not be executed appropriately but result in schedule execution error status in case lamp does not light or and display data are not stored in the projector at the scheduled event execution time Events Input Source and My Image will not be executed if security feature is enabled and the projector is locked due to the feature Certain error state in the projector such as temperature error lamp error will prevent the projector from appropriate execution of scheduled functions events f no USB memory device is inserted to the projector or no image data for display exists at the scheduled event time a schedule execution error occurs against the scheduled Slideshow event When yo
219. etwork configuration on your computer to connect to the projector This dialog will be displayed when you Do you want to apply suggested network settings as follows need to add a Network configuration on IP adcress i92150 105 your computer to connect to the projector Subnet mask 2552552550 _ Cange Confirm with your network administrator if Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings the Network configuration displayed on the dialog is OK and then click the Yes Click the NO then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed even though the network is not established Click 2 on the main menu and go back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method If you put a check mark in the box Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings the projector memorizes current configuration and this dialog is not displayed again To display this dialog again click Option icon in the LiveViewer main menu and remove the check mark in the box Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings If you want to change the Network configuration to add click the Change A Saks dialog for changing the Network configuration Sume c as shown to the right will be displayed Enter IP address and subnet mask then click the OK Procedure to connect to the projector will start Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination If you cl
220. f COMPUTER button is 5 5 pressed when VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT port lt gt is selected the projector will check COMPUTER IN1 port first e It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port 1 Press VIDEO button on the remote control VIDEO button Each time you press the button the projector switches its Ko input port from the current port as below 4 gt COMPONENT gt S VIDEO gt VIDEO O e While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION 5090 menu the projector will keep checking every port sequentially till an input signal is detected If VIDEO button is pressed when COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 LAN USB TYPEA or USB TYPE B port is selected the projector will check HDMI port first 1 Press the MY SOURCE DOC CAMERA button on MY SOURCE the remote control The input signal will be changed DOC CAMERA button into the signal you set as MY SOURCE dA e This function also can use for document camera Select the e O input port that connected the document camera Q M 9 9 ViewSonic 23 Pro9500 Searching an input signal SEARCH button 1 Press SEARCH button on the remote control MR The projector will start to check its input ports as below order to find any input signals 6606060 When an input is found the projector will stop searc
221. figure each item Refer to item 3 5 Mail Settings for further information 4 Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE Click the Send Test Mail button in the Mail Settings to confirm that the e mail settings are correct The following mail will be delivered to the specified addresses Subject line Test Mail Projector name Text Send Test Mail Date Testing date Time Testing time IP Address Projector IP address gt MAC Address Projector MAC address gt ViewSonic 182 Pro9500 7 1 E mail Alerts Continued 5 Click the Alert Settings on the main menu to configure the E mail Alerts settings 6 Select and configure each alert item Refer to item 3 6 Alert Setting for further information 7 Click the Apply button to save the settings Failure Warning e mails are formatted as follows Subject line Mail title Projector name Text Mail text gt Date Failure Warning date Time Failure Warning time IP Address Projector IP address gt MAC Address Projector MAC address gt ViewSonic 183 Pro9500 7 2 Projector Management using SNMP The SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol enables to manage the projector information which is a failure or warning status from the computer on the network The SNMP management software will be required on the computer to use this function NOTE It is recommended that SNMP functions be carried out by a network admin
222. g on the projector refer to the NOTE ViewSonic 130 Pro9500 1 7 Configuring the network settings manually continued Wired LAN 1 Enter the following information for the Enter the following information projector 1 TP address IP address 192 168 1 10 example Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 example Enter Projector IP Address and Subnet mask Bak Connect Exit 2 Click the Connect 3 The network connection will be established Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 1 To find the network setting on the projector refer to the NOTE Troubleshooting W A network connection could not be established Windows prevented network configuration network connection could not be established C h an g es Windows prevented network configuration changes Please insure that you are authorized to make these changes or check your security settings You may log in the Windows under User authority Click the OK then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed even though the network is not established Click 2 on the main menu and go back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method Consult to the network administrator Log in the Windows under Administrator authority After that please resume at item 1 3 2 Starting the LiveViewer ViewSonic 131 Pro9500 1 7 Configuring the network settings manually continued E f you need to add a N
223. g to the following table For the SECURITY indicator see SECURITY INDICATOR in the SECURITY menu POWER indicator LAMP indicator TEMP indicator Description Lighting In Orange Turned off Turned off The projector is in a standby state Please refer to the section Power on off Blinking In Green Turned off Turned off The projector is warming up Please wait Lighting In Green Blinking In Orange Turned off Turned off Turned off Turned off The projector is in an on state Ordinary operations may be performed The projector is cooling down Please wait Blinking In Red discre tionary discre tionary The projector is cooling down A certain error has been detected Please wait until POWER indicator finishes blinking and then perform the proper measure using the item descriptions below Blinking In Red Or Lighting In Red Lighting In Red Turned off The lamp does not light and there is a possibility that interior portion has become heated Please turn the power off and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation of the following items and then turn the power on again s there blockage of the air passage aperture s the air filter dirty Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35 C If the same indication is displayed after the remedy
224. gain Turned Lighting Is there blockage of the air passage aperture Blinking In Red ar off In Red Is the air filter dirty Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35 s the setting for FAN SPEED appropriate For details on FAN SPEED refer to FAN SPEED of SERVICE in the OPTION menu If the projector is used with a wrong setting it may cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside Lighting In Red It is time to clean the air filter Please immediately turn the power off and clean or change the air filter referring to the section Cleaning and replacing the air filter After cleaning or changing the air filter please be sure to reset the filter timer After the remedy reset the power to ON Lighting Simultaneous In Green blinking in Red There is a possibility that the interior portion has become overcooled Please use the unit within the usage temperature parameters 5 to 35 After the treatment reset the power to ON Lighting Alternative In Green blinking in Red Blinking In At least 1 Power ON schedule is saved to the Green for projector approx 3 Please refer to 3 7 Schedule Settings in the Network seconds Guide NOTE When the interior portion has become overheated for safety purposes the projector is automatically shut down and the indicator lamps may also be turned off In such a case disconnect the power cord and wait at least 45 minutes After the
225. ged line of the picture for a quick moving object In such a case please select OFF even though the screen image may lose sharpness Using the A Y buttons switches the noise reduction mode HIGH lt gt MID lt LOW This function works only for a video signal s video signal component video signal of 480i 60 or 576i 50 or 1080i 50 60 and an HDMI signal of 480i 60 or 5761 50 or 1080i 50 60 Using the A V buttons switches the mode for color space AUTO lt gt RGB lt gt SMPTE240 lt gt REC709 lt gt REC601 ft fr This item can be selected only for a computer signal except for signals from the LAN USB TYPE A and USB TYPE B ports or a component video signal except SCART RGB The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode The AUTO operation may not work well at some signals In such a case it might be good to select a suitable mode except AUTO Using the A buttons switches the function of the COMPONENT ports COMPONENT lt gt SCART RGB When the SCART RGB is selected the COMPONENT Y Cb Pb Cr Pr and VIDEO ports will function as a SCART RGB port A SCART adapter or SCART cable is required for a SCART RGB input to the projector For details contact your dealer continued on next page ViewSonic 42 Pro9500 Description The video format for S VIDEO port and VIDEO port can be set 1 Use the A Y buttons to select the input port lt VIDEO FORMAT e NTSG M
226. gnals which are not supported by this projector Although the projector can display signals with resolution up to UXGA 1600X1200 the signal will be converted to the projector s panel resolution before being displayed The best display performance will be achieved if the resolutions of the input signal and the projector panel are identical f you connect this projector and a notebook computer you need output the display to an external monitor or output simultaneously to the internal display and an external monitor Consult the computer s manual for the setting Depending on the input signal the automatic adjustment function of this projector may take some time and not function correctly Note that a composite sync signal or sync on green signal may confuse the automatic adjustment function of this projector If the automatic adjustment function does not work correctly you may not see the dialog to set the display resolution In such a case use an external display device You may be able to see the dialog and set an appropriate display resolution continued on next page ViewSonic 14 Pro9500 Connecting with your devices continued Computer LAN USB RS 232C TYPEA Access J USB DCSV 0 5 _UsB COMPUTER IN1 GY ucbiPb RICrIPr
227. haracters Continued 7 To change an already inserted character press the A button to move the cursor to the first line and use the lt gt buttons to move the cursor on the character to be changed After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button the character is selected Then follow the same procedure as described at the item 6 above 8 To finish entering text move the cursor to the OK on screen and press the gt ENTER or INPUT button To revert to the previous name without saving changes move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and press the 4 ENTER or INPUT button DELETE ALLGLEAR Using the cursor buttons switches the mode for the template Screen Press the gt cursor or the ENTER button to display the selected template and press the 4 cursor button to close the displayed Screen The last selected template is displayed when the MY BUTTON allocated to the TEMPLATE function is pressed TEMPLATE TEST PATTERN lt gt DOT LINE1 lt gt DOT LINE2 lt DOT LINE3 STACK lt gt MAP2 lt gt MAP1 CIRCLE2 lt gt CIRCLE1 lt DOT LINE4 You can turn a map upside down and scroll it horizontally when MAP1 or MAP2 is selected To invert or scroll the map display the guidance by pressing the RESET button on the remote three seconds or more when 1 or MAP2 appears continued on next page ViewSonic 55 Pro9500 Description C C Closed Caption ViewSonic The C C is the function
228. he A F buttons to highlight FOLLOW 0068 UNIT and press the button to complete the set 1779220 EXIT ting 5 Press the COMPUTER or VIDEO button on the remote control the INPUT button on the con COMPUTERIN2 trol panel of the Main projector the MAIN INPUT SOURCE dialog is displayed on screen Use the buttons to highlight the port to which the S VIDEO VIDEO signal cable is connected and press the button BEN to complete the setting NOTE If FOLLOW MAIN UNIT is selected selecting the input source on either the Main or Sub projector will automatically set the other projector to the same source If FOLLOW MAIN UNIT is selected LAN USB TYPE and USB B cannot be selected When FOLLOW MAIN UNIT is selected if any button for setting the input ports including COMPUTER VIDEO MY SOURCE DOC CAMERA and MY BUTTON assigned with input source related functions buttons on the remote control and the INPUT button on the projector is pressed the dialog for selecting the input source will be displayed ViewSonic 253 Pro9500 6 Restrictions Schedule function This model supports the Schedule function on the Web Control feature Network Guide 3 Web Control 3 7 Schedule Settings There are some restrictions on the functions when Intellectual Stack with RS 232C connection is used But for Simple Stack without an RS 232C conn
229. he is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 12 If the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 13 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library does not specify a license version number you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 14 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs who
230. he mode for the blank screen The blank screen is a screen for the temporarily blanking feature It is displayed by pressing the BLANK button on the remote control MyScreen amp ORIGINAL BLUE lt gt WHITE lt gt BLACK ft 3 MyScreen Screen be registered by the MyScreen item ORIGINAL Screen preset as the standard screen BLUE WHITE BLACK Plain screens in each color To avoid remaining as an afterimage the MyScreen or ORIGINAL screen will change to the plain black screen after several minutes Using the A V buttons switches the mode for the start up screen The start up screen is a screen displayed when no signal or an unsuitable signal is detected MyScreen lt gt ORIGINAL OFF t MyScreen Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item START UP ORIGINAL Screen preset as the standard screen OFF Plain black screen To avoid remaining as an afterimage the MyScreen or ORIGINAL screen will change to the BLANK screen after several minutes If also the BLANK screen is the MyScreen or ORIGINAL the plain black screen is instead used When the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item in the SECURITY menu the START UP is fixed to MyScreen continued on next page ViewSonic 51 Pro9500 Description MyScreen This item allows you to capture an image for use as a MyScreen image which can be used as the BLANK screen and START UP screen Display the image you want to c
231. he right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the Pro9500 License Agreement other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following Accompany it with the complete corresponding machin ereadable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The source code
232. he screen on the projector is rewritten slower because the transferred data is larger but the image quality is better Keep PC resolution If you remove the check mark from the Keep PC resolution box the screen resolution of your computer will be switched as follows and the display speed may be faster Pro9500 1024X768 XGA If your computer does not support the display resolution specified above a smaller resolution that is the largest among the resolutions that are supported by the computer will be selected NOTE When the resolution is changed the arrangement of icons on computer desktop screen may be changed About The version information of the LiveViewer Lite for USB ViewSonic 91 Pro9500 Maintenance Replacing the lamp A lamp has finite product life Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause the pictures darker or the color tone poor Note that each lamp has a different lifetime and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended To prepare a new lamp make contact with your dealer and tell the lamp type number Type number RLC 063 DT01175 Replacing the lamp 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes 2 Prepare a new lamp If the projector is mounted on ceiling or if the lamp has broken also ask the dealer to replace the lamp In case
233. hen enter the same password again 1 4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press gt button to display the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds then please make note of the password during NOTE NEW PASSWORD this time Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control button on the projector will return to the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu 2 Turning off the MY TEXT PASSWORD 2 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu 2 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large Enter the RESISTOR registered password and the screen will Inquiring Code OSES return to the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off So ED menu ENTER PASSWORD box If an incorrect password is input the menu will close large If necessary repeat the process from 2 1 3 If you have forgotten your password 3 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu 3 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large The 10 digit inquiring code will be displayed inside the box 3 3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit inquiring code Your password will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed MY TEXT PASSWORD NEW PASSWORD AGAIN MY TEXT PASSWORD continued next page ViewSonic 78 Pro9500 Description 1 Use the buttons on the SECURITY menu to select the MY TEXT DISPLAY and pre
234. hing and display the image If no signal is found the projector will 5 return to the state selected before the operation OCS gt COMPUTER IN1 gt COMPUTER IN2 gt LAN m VIDEO USB TYPEA OO v S VIDEO USB TYPE B COMPONENT HDMI e While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu the projector will keep checking the ports in above order repeatedly till an input signal is detected e t may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port Selecting an aspect ratio 1 Press ASPECT button on the remote control Each time you press the button the projector switches the ASPECT button mode for aspect ratio in turn O For a computer signal 99 OO NORMAL lt gt 4 3 lt gt 16 9 lt gt 16 10 0905 an signal Dacos D NORMAL lt gt 4 3 16 9 lt gt 16 10 lt gt 14 9 o 5 71 O For a video signal s video signal or component video signal 4 3 lt gt 16 9 lt gt 14 9 an input signal from the LAN USB or USB TYPE B port or if there is no signal e ASPECT button does not work when no proper signal is inputted e NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio setting ViewSonic 24 Pro9500 Adjusting the projector s elevator When the place to put the projector is slightly uneven to the left or right use the elevator feet to place the projector horizontally Using
235. ible Plug and Play can be used by connecting this projector to a computer that is VESA DDC display data channel compatible Take advantage of this feature by connecting a computer cable to the COMPUTER IN1 port DDC 2B compatible Plug and Play may not work properly if any other type of connection is attempted Please use the standard drivers in your computer as this projector is a Plug and Play monitor continued on next page ViewSonic 13 Pro9500 Connecting with your devices continued Computer AUDIO USB OUT HDMI TYPEA DISPLAY RS 232C eee EM d AUI RE Hee USB B IN1 GIY o 39 COMPU RIN2 L CONTROL CONTROL COMPONENT Cr NOTE Before connecting the projector to a computer consult the computer s manual and check the compatibility of the signal level the synchronization methods and the display resolution output to the projector Some signal may need an adapter to input this projector Some computers have multiple screen display modes that may include some si
236. ick the Cancel you will return to the dialog for adding a Network configuration Cancel ViewSonic 132 Pro9500 1 7 Configuring the network settings manually continued If the entered IP address and projector s IP address the same warning dialog shown Esc testen to the right will be displayed Click the OK and then enter a different IP address from the projector s one in the dialog for changing Network configuration If the connection is not available with the entered Network configuration a warning dialog shown to the right will be displayed Click the OK to return to the dialog for changing the Network configuration and then enter appropriate configuration Incorrect IP Address NOTE Network configuration to connect to the projector has been added on the computer the added Network configuration will be erased once the application software is closed Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector The message is appeared when the wireless adapter you selected is already used for another network connection Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector To connect click the Yes Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination Not to connect click the No then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed even though the network is not established Click on the main menu to go bac
237. iewSonic respects the environment and is committed to working and living green Thank you for being part of Smarter Greener Computing Please visit ViewSonic website to learn more USA amp Canada http www viewsonic com company green recycle program Europe http www viewsoniceurope com uk support recycling information Taiwan http recycle epa gov tw recycle index2 aspx ViewSonic iv Pro9500 Projector Pro9500 User s Manual detailed Operating Guide INNOVO Various symbols are used in this manual The meanings of these symbols are described below AWARNING This symbol indicates information that if ignored could possibly result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling ANCAUTION This symbol indicates information that if ignored could possibly result in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect handling NOTICE This entry notices of fear of causing trouble Please refer to the pages written following this symbol NOTE information in this manual is subject to change without notice The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual The reproduction transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent Trademark acknowledgment Mac is a registered trademark of Apple Inc Windows DirectDraw and Direct3D are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
238. ilizza moduli software concessi in licenza come freeware in conformit alla GNU General Public License Version 2 e alla GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 stabilite dalla Free Software Foundation Inc Stati Uniti o dagli accordi di licenza per ciascun software Consultare la seguente pagina web per gli accordi di licenza relativi a tali moduli software e ad altri software Indirizzo pagina web http www viewsonic com products pro9500 htm Rivolgersi al rivenditore per ulteriori informazioni riguardanti il software concesso in licenza Consultare gli accordi di licenza di ciascun software alle seguenti pagine e gli accordi di licenza di ciascun software sulla pagina web per informazioni sulle condizioni di licenza e cosi via Siccome i seguenti accordi di licenza sono stabiliti da un terzo e non da noi sono riportati nella versione originale in lingua inglese Siccome il programma il modulo software concesso in licenza a titolo gratuito il programma viene fornito cosi com senza garanzia di alcun tipo n espressa n implicita nei limiti consentiti dalla legge applicabile Inoltre non ci assumiamo responsabilit alcuna e non provvederemo ad alcun risarcimento per qualsivoglia perdita compresa ma non limitata a perdita di dati perdita di precisione o perdita di compatibilit con l interfaccia tra altri programmi risultante dal software in oggetto e o dall utilizzo di tale software nei limiti consentiti dalla l
239. ing in a profile data follow the process below 1 Choose a profile data that you want to check 2 Move the mouse cursor to the profile data and click the right button on the mouse to display a pop up menu 3 Select the Property in the pop up menu and click the left button on the mouse 4 The setting information of the selected profile data is shown If the DHCP is set on in the projector the network connection between the projector and computer may not be established since IP address may be varied If you like to use the Profile connection set the DHCP off in the projector ViewSonic 127 Pro9500 1 6 Manual configuration continued 1 6 2 History connection The LiveViewer can memory the network settings when connecting to the projector as a history record After that selecting a history record can quickly connect the network with the projector Select the manual connection method you would like to use C Profile Profile name Date created Profile 1 11 30 2009 3 19 46 PM Profile 2 11 30 2009 3 19 41 PM New Edt My Connection 1 Select the History Projectar 2 Projectar 3 192 168 1 Register to profile 2 Choose a history record listed in the window Configure Network Settings Manually lt Back Connect Exit 3 Click the Connect 4 The network connection will be established Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to
240. ing those lights ViewSonic 19 Pro9500 Changing the frequency of remote control signal The accessory remote control has the two choices on signal 1 Ic frequency Mode 1 NORMAL and Mode 2 HIGH If the remote control sago does not function properly attempt to change the signal frequency In order to set the Mode please keep pressing the combination of Oo e two buttons listed below simultaneously for about 3 seconds 1 Set to Mode 1 NORMAL VOLUME and RESET buttons 2 6590 2 Set to Mode 2 HIGH MAGNIFY OFF and ESC buttons ee Please remember that the REMOTE FREQ in the SERVICE item of 4 the OPTION menu of the projector to be controlled should be set to lt the same mode as the remote control Using as a simple PC mouse amp keyboard The accessory remote control works as a simple mouse and keyboard of the computer when the projector s USB TYPE B port and the computer s type A USB port are connected and MOUSE is selected for the USB TYPE B item in the OPTION menu 1 PAGE UP key Press PAGE UP button port 2 PAGE DOWN key Press PAGE DOWN button 3 Mouse left button Press ENTER button 550 4 Move pointer Use the cursor buttons A V 4 and 5555 1 5 ESC key Press ESC button e 6 Mouse right button Press RESET button jo 2 9 6 NOTE When the simple mouse amp ke
241. inued on next page ViewSonic 72 Pro9500 Description INFORMATION SERVICE ViewSonic Selecting this item displays the NETWORK INFORMATION dialog for confirming the network settings NETWORK INFORMATION PASSCODE 0000 0000 0000 PROJECTOR NAME Projector Name IP ADDRESS 192 168 1 254 SUBNET MASK 25512552550 DEFAULT 0 0 0 0 DNS SERVER 0 0 0 0 MAC ADDRESS FF FF FF FF FF FF TIME DIFFERENCE GMTO00 00 DATE AND TIME 2000 1 1 0 00 EXIT For the details of PASSCODE see the section 1 5 Selecting the network connection method in the Network Guide Only the first 16 characters of the projector name are displayed When the voltage level of the battery for the built in clock decreases the set time may become incorrect even though accurate date and time are input Replace the battery suitably 2493 ADDRESS SUBNET MASK and DEFAULT GATEWAY indicate 0 0 0 0 when DHCP is ON and the projector has not gotten address from DHCP server Executing this item restarts and initializes the network functions Choose the RESTART EXECUTE using the button gt amp SERVICE RETURN Then use the button to execute as NETWORK RESTART GO Network will be once cut off when choose restart If DHCP is selected on IP address may be changed After selecting RESTART EXECUTE NETWORK menu may not be controlled approx 30 seconds 73 Pro9500 5 E UJ
242. ion continued 3 To close the MENU press the MENU button again or select EXIT and press the 4 cursor button or ENTER button Even if you do not do anything the dialog will automatically disappear after about 30 seconds e If you want to move the menu position use the cursor buttons after pressing the POSITION button e Some functions cannot be performed when a certain input port is selected or when a certain input signal is displayed e When you want to reset the operation press RESET button on the remote control during the operation Note that some items ex LANGUAGE VOLUME cannot be reset e In the ADVANCED MENU when you want to return to the previous display press the lt cursor button or ESC button on the remote control Indication in OSD On Screen Display gt BRIGHTNESS 5 4 MY MEMORY _LOAD 4 RETURN FILTER TIME 9 TEMPORARY CONDITION 2 2 ARE YOU SURE YOU WISH TO LOAD EXIT The meanings of the general words on the OSD are as follows Indication Meaning EXIT Selecting this word finishes the OSD menu It s the same as pressing the MENU button RETURN Selecting this word returns the menu to the previous menu Selecting this word cancels the operation in the present GATHERED menu and returns to the previous menu Selecting this word executes the prepared function or shifts the menu to the next menu OK or YES ViewSonic 33 Pro9500 EASY MENU From the E
243. ion may not work well This function is unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR is ON or the screen is adjusted by PERFECT FIT Using the lt P gt buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion Shrink the bottom of the image lt gt Shrink the top of the image adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs For some input this function may not work well When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE telephoto focus this function may be excessive This function should be used when the zoom adjustment is set to the full WIDE wide angle focus whenever possible This function is unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR is ON or the screen is adjusted by PERFECT FIT continued on next page ViewSonic 46 Pro9500 Description KEYSTONE PERFECT FIT AUTO ECO MODE ECO MODE MIRROR Using the lt gt buttons corrects the horizontal keystone distortion Shrink the right of the image lt gt Shrink the left of the image The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs For some input this function may not work well When the horizontal lens shift is not set to the center this function may not work well This function is unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR is ON or the screen is adjusted by PERFECT FIT Selecting this item displays the KEYSTONE PERFECT FIT dialog For details see PERFECT FIT in Correcting the distortion This is unavailable when the
244. iption of the problem and e the serial number of the product 2 Take or ship the product in the original container packaging to an authorized ViewSonic service center 3 Round trip transportation costs for in warranty products will be paid by ViewSonic Limitation of implied warranties There are no warranties express or implied which extend beyond the description contained herein including the implied warranty of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Exclusion of damages ViewSonic s liability is limited to the cost of repair or replacement of the product ViewSonic shall not be liable for 1 Damage to other property caused by any defects in the product damages based upon inconvenience loss of use of the product loss of time loss of profits loss of business opportunity loss of goodwill interference with business relationships or other commercial loss even if advised of the possibility of such damages Any other damages whether incidental consequential or otherwise Any claim against the customer by any other party Repair or attempted repair by anyone not authorized by ViewSonic BON ViewSonic 282 Pro9500 Contact Information for Sales amp Authorized Service Centro Autorizado de Servicio within Mexico Name address of manufacturer and importers M xico Av de la Palma 8 Piso 2 Despacho 203 Corporativo Interpalmas Col San Fernando Huixquilucan Estado de M xico Tel 55 3605 1099 http
245. is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found one line to give the program s name and a brief idea of what it does Copyright O year name of author This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin St Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail If the program is interactive make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode Gnomovision version 69 Copyright year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type show C for details The hypothetic
246. isen yhteensopivuuden menetyst ohjelmiston osalta ja tai ohjelmiston k yt n osalta sovellettavan lain sallimissa rajoissa ViewSonic 270 Pro9500 Umowa licencyjna uzytkownika koncowego oprogramowania projektora Oprogramowanie projektora sktada sie z pewnej liczby niezaleznych modut w oprogramowania a ka dy z takich modu w jest obj ty naszym prawem autorskim lub prawem autorskim strony trzeciej Projektor korzysta r wnie z modu w oprogramowania kt re stworzyli my i lub wyprodukowali my Ka de takie oprogramowanie oraz powi zane elementy w czaj c ale nie ograniczaj c si do dokumentacji oprogramowania obj te jest prawem autorskim i prawami w asno ci intelektualnej Powy sze prawa s chronione prawem autorskim i innymi maj cymi zastosowanie prawami Ponadto projektor korzysta z bezp atnych modu w oprogramowania licencjonowanych na zasadzie GNU General Public License Version 2 i GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 ustanowionych przez Free Software Foundation Inc U S lub porozumie licencyjnych dla poszczeg lnych program w Umowy licencyjne dla takich modut w oprogramowania oraz innego oprogramowania mo na znale na poni szej stronie internetowej Adres strony internetowej http www viewsonic com products pro9500 htm Pytania dotycz ce licencjowanego oprogramowania mo na kierowa do swojego sprzedawcy Szczeg y warunk w licencji oraz podobne informacje dotycz ce um w
247. isplay the INPUT menu Otherwise use the 4 gt buttons to highlight EXIT and press the button to complete the setting SYNC ON G AUTO OFF VIDEO 4 Select VIDEO FORMAT in the INPUT r o menu to display the VIDEO FORMAT nh pu p jn js dialog COMPLTERIN2 Select AUTO or an appropriate format for the video signal input Then use the 4 5 buttons to highlight EXIT and press the button to complete the setting Inputting image to Sub and Main individually 1 If the STACK menu is already displayed on the screen proceed to 3 below Otherwise press the MENU button on the remote control If the MENU dialog is displayed use the buttons to highlight MAIN and press the button A menu will be displayed If the MENU dialog is not displayed the STACK menu will appear 2 Use the A lt gt buttons to go into the following menu ADVANCED MENU OPTION SERVICE COMMUNICATION STACK gt SERVICE gt COMMUNICATION gt STACK DUAL ALTERNATE MODE NORMAL SUB INPUT SOURCE FOLLOW MAIN UNIT STACK menu will appear on screen Op erating Guide OPTION menu continued on next page ViewSonic 252 Pro9500 Setting input ports using menu 5 4 Setting the menu Inputting image to Sub and Main individually continued Use the buttons to highlight SUB INPUT SOURCE and press the gt button to display the SUB INPUT SOURCE dialog 4 Use t
248. ission to the projector is started and the images will be displayed Q Stop button The image transmission is stopped Hold button The image on the projector s screen is temporally frozen The last image before the button is clicked is remained on the screen You can revise the image data on your computer without showing it on the projector s screen Option button The Options window is displayed Minimize button The Floating menu is closed and the icon reappears in the Windows notification area Om NOTE If you click the Start capture button and or Stop button repeatedly images may not be displayed on the screen ViewSonic 90 Pro9500 USB Display continued Options window If you select the Option button on the Floating menu the Options window is displayed Settings About Optimize Performance Transmission speed Image quality Keep PC resolution Close Optimize Performance The LiveViewer Lite for USB captures screenshots in JPEG data and sends them to the projector The LiveViewer Lite for USB has two options that have different compression rate of JPEG data Transmission speed Speed takes priority over Image quality It makes JPEG compression rate higher The screen on the projector is rewritten quicker because the transferred data is smaller but the image quality is worse Image quality Image quality takes priority over Speed It makes JPEG compression rate lower T
249. ission will be stopped when you click the Single mode button while the projector is in the Single PC mode or you click one of the Multi mode buttons that shows the quarter screen which is currently displaying your computer images in the Multi PC mode If the Multi PC mode is selected the projector screen is automatically divided to 4 zones When the Presenter mode is enabled and the projector is used by a computer in the Single PC mode images from other computers cannot be sent to the projector even if the c Full screen button is pressed When quarter screen occupied by another computer is selected image transmission from that computer will be put on hold and the image of the currently specified computer will be displayed The display mode can be set also by using the MULTI PC MODE in the PRESENTATION item in the NETWORK menu The last setting made will take effect regardless of the setting method ViewSonic 144 Pro9500 2 1 Using the LiveViewer continued 2 1 4 Option menu Clicking the Option button displays the option menu on screen Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings 4 Optimize Performance 1 Transmission speed f Image quality v Presenter Made Display User Name Unnamed O Close displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings This setting allows you to choose to display or not the confirmation dial
250. istrator SNMP management software must be installed on the computer to monitor the projector via SNMP SNMP Settings Configure the following items via a web browser to use SNMP Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Port Settings on the main menu 4 Click the Download MIB file to download a MIB file NOTE use the downloaded MIB file specify the file by your SNMP manager 5 Click the Enable check box to open the SNMP Port Set the IP address to send the SNMP trap to when a Failure Warning occurs NOTE Network Restart is required after the SNMP Port configuration settings have been changed Click the Network Restart and configure the following items 6 Click the Security Settings on the main menu 7 Click the SNMP and set the community name on the screen that is displayed NOTE A Network Restart is required after the Community name has been changed Click the Network Restart and configure the following items 8 Configure the settings for Trap transmission of Failures Warnings Click the Alert Settings on the main menu and select the Failure Warning item to be configured 9 Click the Enable check box to send out the SNMP trap for Failures Warnings Clear the Enable check box when SNMP trap transmission i
251. itions Do not apply a shock or pressure to this product gt Do not look into the lens and the openings on the projector while the lamp is on gt Keep the pocket caps away from children and pets Make sure they do not swallow the caps If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment ANCAUTION not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust A vents during use or just after use since it is too hot Do not attach anything onto the lens except the lens cover of this projector because it could damage the lens such as melting the lens continued on next page ViewSonic 7 Pro9500 Part names continued Control panel and Lens adjusters 1 Lens adjuster door 2 FOCUS ring 3 ZOOM ring 4 HORIZONTAL horizontal adjuster 5 VERTICAL vertical adjuster 6 LOCK horizontal lens position lock 7 STANDBY ON button 8 INPUT button 9 MENU button 10 SECURITY indicator 11 LAMP indicator 12 TEMP indicator 13 POWER indicator 14 Cap storage pockets Rear panel 1 LAN port 11 COMPUTER IN2 ports 2 USB TYPE A port G Y B Cb Pb R Cr Pr H V 3 HDMI port 12 REMOTE CONTROL port 4 USB TYPE B port 13 MONITOR OUT port 5 MIC port 14 CONTROL port 6 AUDIO IN1 port 15 COMPONENT ports Y Cb Pb Cr Pr 7 AUDIO IN2 port 16 VIDEO port 8 AUDIO IN3 R L ports 17 S VIDEO ports 9 AUDIO OUT R L ports 18 Shutdown switch 10
252. k to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method ViewSonic 133 Pro9500 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 1 8 1 Connection and transmission When the network connection is established Connection to Projector successful the Connection to Projector successful screen is displayed address 1921681100 Are you sure that you want to display images on the projector Make sure that the right projector that you want to send your image to is selected by checking the projector name and IP address shown in the screen I Register this setting to My Connection Yes No To send images to the projector click the Yes The transmission will be started To display the transmitted images select the LAN port as input source on the projector e Not to send click the No then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed in stand by mode Stand by mode is the state where there is no image transmission although the network connection is established The transmission can be started if you click or button on the LiveViewer main menu If you wish to use the current connection setting as a profile data for My Connection check in the box for the Register this setting to My Connection Troubleshooting E This projector is currently in use Presenting by another user The projector you want to send your images This projector is currently in use P
253. l to be sent The length of the subject line can be up to 100 alphanumeric characters Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure Configures the text of the e mail to be sent The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric characters but if you are using some of special characters below the length may be shorter Special characters amp and space Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure Send Mail Mail Subject Mail Text Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE The trigger of Filter Error e mail is depending on the FILTER MESSAGE setting in the SERVICE item of the OPTION menu which defines the period until the filter message is displayed on the projector screen An e mail will be sent when the usage time of the filter exceeds the time limit that is set No notification e mail will be sent if the FILTER MESSAGE is set to TURN OFF OPTION menu in the Operating Guide Lamp Time Alarm is defined as a threshold for e mail notification reminder of the lamp timer When the lamp hour exceeds this threshold that is configured through the Web page the e mail will be sent out Filter Time Alarm is defined as a threshold for e mail notification reminder of the filter time When the filter hour exceeds this threshold that is configured in the Web page the e mail will be sent out ViewSonic 158 Pro9500 3 7 Schedule Settings Displays and configures schedu
254. lace them with the new ones 8 Combine the two parts to reassemble the filter unit 9 Put the filter unit back into the projector continued on next page ViewSonic 94 Pro9500 Cleaning and replacing the air filter continued 1 0 Put the filter cover back into the place 1 1 Turn the projector on and reset the filter time using the FILTER TIME item in the EASY MENU 1 Press the MENU button to display a menu 2 Point at the FILTER TIME using the A Y cursor buttons then press the gt cursor or the ENTER the RESET button A dialog will appear 3 Press gt cursor button to select the on the dialog It performs resetting the filter time NOTE Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air filter for a suitable indication about the air filter The projector may display the message such as the CHECK THE AIR FLOW or turn off the projector to prevent the internal heat level rising ViewSonic 95 Pro9500 Replacing the internal clock battery This projector has internal clock that uses a battery When the clock of the network function does not work correctly please try solution by replacement of the battery HITACHI MAXELL part number CR2032 or CR2032H 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow f the projector to cool sufficiently 2 After making sure that the projector has cooled adequately slowly turn over the projecto
255. large 3 If you have forgotten your password 3 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu 3 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the box 3 3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code Your password will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed TRANSITION DETECTOR ON gt gt 4 RETURN continued on next page ViewSonic 77 9500 Description MY TEXT PASSWORD The MY TEXT PASSWORD function can prevent the MY TEXT from being overwritten When the password is set for the MY TEXT The MY TEXT DISPLAY menu will be unavailable which can prohibit changing the DISPLAY setting The MY TEXT WRITING menu will be unavailable which can prevent the MY TEXT from being overwritten 1 Turning on the MY TEXT PASSWORD 1 1 Use the A Y buttons on the SECURITY menu to emen select the MY TEXT PASSWORD and press the ais gt button to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD RETURN EXIT on off menu 1 2 Use the A Y buttons on the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu to select ON The ENTER NEW PASSWORD box small will ENTER NENIRASSHORD be displayed Deot 1 3 Use the A Y lt 4 p buttons to enter the ENTER NEW PASSWORD password Move the cursor to the right side box small of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box small and press the button to display the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and t
256. le settings Description Daily Configures the daily schedule Sunday Configures the Sunday schedule Monday Configures the Monday schedule Tuesday Configures the Tuesday schedule Wednesday Configures the Wednesday schedule Thursday Configures the Thursday schedule Friday Configures the Friday schedule Saturday Configures the Saturday schedule Specific date No 1 Configures the specific date No 1 schedule Specific date No 2 Configures the specific date No 2 schedule Specific date No 3 Configures the specific date No 3 schedule Specific date No 4 Configures the specific date No 4 schedule Specific date No 5 Configures the specific date No 5 schedule ViewSonic 159 Pro9500 3 7 Schedule Settings Continued The schedule settings are shown below Item Description Schedule Click the Enable check box to enable the schedule Configures the month and date Date Month Day This item appears only when Specific date No 1 5 is selected Click the Apply button to save the settings The current event settings are displayed on the schedule list To add additional functions and events set the following items Item Description Time Configures the time to execute commands Command Parameter Power Configures the parameters for power control Input Source Configures the parameters for input switching My Image Configures the param
257. licencyjnych dla ka dego oprogramowania mo na znale na nast puj cych stronach lub na stronach internetowych Poniewa nast puj ce umowy licencyjne zosta y sporz dzone prze strony trzecie pozostaj w oryginalnym j zyku angielskim Poniewa ten program modu oprogramowania jest na bezp atnej licencji dostarczany jest bez adnych gwarancji jasno wyra onych lub implikowanych w pe nym zakresie dopuszczonym prawem Nie bierzemy adnej odpowiedzialno ci ani nie rekompensujemy adnych strat w czaj c ale nie ograniczaj c sie do utraty danych utraty precyzji lub utraty kompatybilno ci pomi dzy innymi programami spowodowanych przez rzeczone oprogramowanie i lub wykorzystanie rzeczonego oprogramowania w zakresie dopuszczonym przez maj ce zastosowanie prawo ViewSonic 271 Pro9500 POL SKI GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 June 1991 Copyright 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin St Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing i Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any oth
258. low the procedures below to turn on the Main projector 1 Use the button to highlight STACK MODE and press the button to display the STACK MODE dialog 2 Use the A Y button to highlight OFF and then press the button to complete the setting 3 Repeat the above procedures to display the STACK MODE dialog again 4 Use the A Y button to highlight SUB and then press the gt button to complete the setting 5 After exiting the menu wait for 10 seconds or more 6 Press the STANDBY ON button on the remote control or control panel of the Main projector the Sub projector will turn off 7 After the projector has cooled down press the STANDBY ON button to turn on again The Main projector will be turned on even if LAMP MODE has been set to AUTO 3 You can change the settings for Intellectual Stack now that the Main projector is operating Go to 5 4 Setting the menu NOTE If the Main projector cannot be turned on due to error or certain problems the Sub projector will be turned on even if you follow the procedures above Take necessary actions to fix the Main projector and then change the settings for Intellectual Stack ViewSonic 250 Pro9500 Setting input ports using menu 5 4 Setting the menu If Intellectual Stack with RS 232C connection is used observe the followings When inputting image signals to Sub via Main the operations differ between using computer signals and video signals such as compo
259. ly low level Adjust the volume to a higher level using the menu function or the remote control The AUDIO SOURCE SPEAKER setting is not correct Correctly set the AUDIO SOURCE SPEAKER in AUDIO menu The mode selected for HDMI AUDIO is not suitable Check each of the two modes provided and select the suitable one for your HDMI audio device The lens cover is attached Remove the lens cover The signal cables are not correctly connected Correctly connect the connection cables The brightness is adjusted to an extremely low level Adjust BRIGHTNESS to a higher level using the menu function The computer cannot detect the projector as a plug and play monitor Make sure that the computer can detect a plug and play monitor using another plug and play monitor The BLANK screen is displayed Press BLANK button on the remote control The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input source even if MOUSE is selected for USB TYPE B Select USB DISPLAY for USB TYPE B in OPTION menu to project the picture input to the port Otherwise select other port for picture input The projector does not recognize the USB storage device inserted into USB TYPE A port Use the REMOVE USB function first remove the USB storage device and then insert it into the port again Before removing the USB storage device be sure to use the REMOVE USB function on the thumbnail screen which appears when the USB TYPE A port is selec
260. n screen messages as shown below and take the necessary actions to resolve the problem Small dialog Example Cover Error Lamp cover is opened 3 Cover Error Lamp Error Lamp does not light up 4 5 Lamp Error Fan Error Problem with cooling fan Fan Error gt EXIT Temp Error Temperature of the projector is too THEE high D Air Flow Error Temperature of the projector is too high check that the exhaust vents are not blocked Filter Error The reading on the filter timer exceeds the hours set in the FILTER 1 Filter Error MESSAGE menu Operating Guide OPTION menu SERVICE Cold Error The ambient temperature is too Cold Error low AN Air Flow Error Ou continued on next page iewSonic 245 Pro9500 STACK menu settings 3 7 Important information for Intellectual Stack continued e f you need to turn off a projector for reasons such as taking corrective actions for an error turn off both the projectors so that Intellectual Stack can be started properly when the projectors are turned on again e If the PIN LOCK or TRANSITION DETECTOR security function on both projectors is set to ON both projectors will turn on Enter the security code for Main first then followed by Sub If ALTERNATE mode is selected one of the projectors will turn off automatically Operating Guide SECURITY menu e If the PIN LOCK or TRANSITION DETECTOR security function on one of the projectors is set t
261. nas ja For more information please consult your dealer ViewSonic 106 Pro9500 ViewSonic 107 Pro9500 Network Guide 4 Gonnectiomtorthemetwork 1 1 System requirements 1 1 1 Required equipment preparation The following equipments are required to connect the projector to your computer through the network Y Projector Y LAN cable to connect the projector to a network CAT 5 or greater Y Computer minimum 1 set equipped with the network feature 100Base TX or 10Base T 1 1 2 Hardware and software requirement for computer The LiveViewer software needs to be installed all the computers to connect to the projector through a network To use the LiveViewer your computer needs to meet the following requirements OS One of the following Windows XP Home Edition Professional Edition 32 bit version only Windows Vista Home Basic Home Premium Business Ultimate Enterprise 32 bit version only Windows 7 Starter Home Basic Home Premium Professional Ultimate Enterprise 32 bit version only CPU Pentium 4 2 8 GHz or higher Graphic card 16 bit XGA or higher When using the LiveViewer it is recommended that the display resolution of your computer is set to 1024 x 768 Memory 512 MB or higher Hard disk space 100 MB or higher Web browser Internet Explorer
262. nd the STANDBY ON button POWER indicator outlet 2 Make sure that the POWER indicator is steady orange Then remove the lens cover 3 Press button on the projector or the remote control The projection lamp will light up and POWER indicator will begin blinking in green When the power is completely on the indicator will stop blinking and light in steady green To display the picture select an input signal according to the section Selecting an input signal Turning off the power 1 Press the STANDBY ON button on the projector or the remote control The message Power off will appear on the screen for about 5 seconds 2 Press the STANDBY ON button again while the message appears The projector lamp will go off and the POWER indicator will begin blinking in orange Then POWER indicator will stop blinking and light in steady orange when the lamp cooling is complete 3 Attach the lens cover after the POWER indicator turns in steady orange Do not turn the projector on for about 10 minutes or more after turning it off Also do not turn the projector off shortly after turning it on Such operations might cause the lamp to malfunction or shorten the lifetime of some parts including the lamp NOTE Turn the power on off in right order Please power on the projector prior to the connected devices This projector has the function that can make the projector automatically turn on off Plea
263. nen osapuolen tekij noikeuksilla Projektori k ytt my s ohjelmistomoduuleja jotka olemme kehitt neet ja tai tuottaneet Kukin ohjelmisto ja niihin liittyv t osat mukaan lukien mutta ei rajoittuen ohjelmistoon liittyv t asiakirjat on suojattu tekij noikeuksilla ja immateriaalioikeuksilla Edell mainitut oikeudet on suojattu tekij noikeuslailla ja muilla soveltuvilla lailla Projektori k ytt Free Software Foundation Inc n USA ilmaisohjelmistomoduuleja GNU General Public License Version 2 ja GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 tai kunkin ohjelmiston lisenssisopimuksia Seuraavalta verkkosivulta saat lis tietoja kyseisten ohjelmistomoduulien ja muiden ohjelmistojen lisenssisopimuksista Verkkosivun osoite http www viewsonic com products pro9500 htm Ota yhteys myyj n saadaksesi tietoa k ytt oikeuksin suojatusta ohjelmistosta Katso kunkin ohjelmiston k ytt oikeussopimus seuraavilta sivuilta ja k ytt oikeussopimusten yksityiskohtaiset tiedot kunkin ohjelmiston verkkosivuilta Seuraavat k ytt oikeussopimukset ovat vain englanniksi koska ne ovat kolmannen osapuolten sopimuksia Koska ohjelma ohjelmistomoduuli on ilmaisohjelmisto se toimitetaan sellaisenaan ilman mink nlaista suoraa tai ep suoraa takuuta sovellettavan lain sallimissa rajoissa Emme ota vastuuta tai korvaa mit n menetyst mukaan lukien mutta ei rajoittuen tietojen menetyst tarkkuuden menetyst tai muiden ohjelmien v l
264. nent and video signals Inputting image from Main to Sub Computer signal 1 If the STACK menu is already displayed on the screen proceed to 3 below Otherwise press the MENU button on the remote control If the MENU dialog is displayed use the buttons to highlight MAIN and press the button A menu will be displayed If the MENU dialog is not displayed the STACK menu will appear 2 Use the A lt gt buttons to go into the following menu ADVANCED MENU gt SERVICE COMMUNICATION STACK gt SERVICE gt COMMUNICATION gt STACK DUAL ALTERNATE MODE STACK menu will appear on screen Oper ating Guide OPTION menu Use the A V buttons to highlight SUB INPUT SOURCE and press the button to display the SUB INPUT SOURCE dialog 4 Use the buttons to highlight FIXED COMPUTER IN 1 and press the gt button to complete the setting 5 Press the COMPUTER or VIDEO button on the RAE remote control or the INPUT button on the control 1277 panel of the Main projector the MAIN INPUT SOURCE dialog is displayed on screen Use the buttons to highlight the port to which the sig nal cable is connected and press the button to complete the setting NORMAL FOLLOW MAIN UNIT RETURN EXIT NOTE When FIXED COMPUTER IN 1 is selected the MONITOR OUT setting is invalid Operating Guide SETUP menu When FIXED COMPUTER IN 1 is sel
265. nnection Description Restarts the projector s network connection in order to Restart activate new configuration settings NOTE Restarting requires you to re log on in order to further control or configure the projector via a web browser Wait 30 seconds or more after clicking the Restart button to log on again ViewSonic 173 Pro9500 4 My Image Functiom The projector can display still images that are transferred via the network Transfer image data S SAN SN SS 555 SS NSS NS NSS 5555 5555 QNS eS Display image data MY IMAGE transmission requires an exclusive application for your computer Use the application to transfer the image data can be downloaded from the ViewSonic web site http www viewsonic com products pro9500 htm Refer to the manual for the application for instructions To display the transferred image select the MY IMAGE item in the NETWORK menu For more information please see the description of the MY IMAGE item of the NETWORK menu NETWORK menu in the Operating Guide NOTE It is possible to allocate the image file up to 4 in the maximum Using MY BUTTON that registered MY IMAGE can display transferred image OPTION menu in the Operating Guide The image file also can be displayed by using schedule function from the web browser Refer to item 7 3 Event Scheduling in detail f you display MY IMAGE d
266. nnection You can restart the network connection by clicking the Network Restart on the main menu ViewSonic 177 Pro9500 6 Network Bridge Function This projector is equipped with the NETWORK BRIDGE function to perform mutual conversion of a network protocol and a serial interface Using the NETWORK BRIDGE function a computer that is connected with this projector by Ethernet communication can control an external device that is connected with this projector by RS 232C communication as a network terminal TCP IP data Protocol change Serial data Ethernet RS 232C RS 232C cable External device CONTROL port 6 1 Connecting devices 1 Connect the projector s LAN port and the computer s LAN port with a LAN cable for Ethernet communication 2 Connect the projector s CONTROL port and the device s RS 232C port with an RS 232C cable for RS 232C communication NOTE Before connecting the devices read the manuals for the devices to ensure the connection For RS 232C connection check the specifications of each port and use the suitable cable ViewSonic 178 Pro9500 6 2 Communication setup To configure the setup of the communication using NETWORK BRIDGE for the projector use items in the COMMUNICATION menu Open the menu of the projector and select the OPTION SERVICE COMMUNICATION menu OPTION menu gt SERVICE gt COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide 1 Using the COMMUNICATION
267. nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you ViewSonic 273 cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by
268. nt Stack function by piling up two projectors you can change the projection angle by adjusting the elevator feet of the unit that is placed underneath Exercise care to prevent the stacked projector from falling off or tipping over while adjusting the elevator AN feet Amaximum of two projectors can be stacked Do not stack three or more projectors Cap storage Do not install the projectors that are stacked using pocket the stack pockets elevator feet and heel of this Stack projector at a place higher than a person s height pocket Do not install the projectors that are stacked using the stack pockets elevator feet and heel of this projector on a ceiling Do not touch the stacked projectors except when instructions are given in this manual Do not hit the projectors with any type of object Pocket cap Stack pocket Elevator feet continued on next page ViewSonic 223 Pro9500 Introduction 1 2 Important safety instruction For Instant Stack feature continued AWARNING When removing the pocket caps from the stack pockets be sure to store them securely and safely inside the lens adjuster door to prevent children and pets from swallowing the caps If swallowed consult a physician immediately ACAUTION Be careful not to injure your nail and finger when removing the pocket caps NOTICE gt Instant Stack is a feature that allows you to stack two projectors or arrange them side by side e
269. nten uttrykt eller underforst tt i den utstrekning loven tillater Og vi tar intet ansvar eller kompenserer for noe tap inkludert men ikke begrenset til tap av data tap av ngyaktighet eller kompatibilitetstap med grensesnittet mellom andre programmer av programvaren det gjelder og eller bruk av programvaren det gjelder i den utstrekning loven tillater ViewSonic 263 Pro9500 Gebruiksrechtovereenkomst EULA voor de projectorsoftware De software in de projector bestaat uit verschillende onafhankelijke softwaremodules waarop ons auteursrecht en of dat van derden is gevestigd De projector gebruikt ook softwaremodules die wij hebben ontwikkeld en of geproduceerd En op zulke software en aanverwante producten maar niet beperkt tot documenten die betrekking hebben op software is ook ons auteurs en intellectuele eigendomsrecht gevestigd Bovenstaande rechten worden beschermd door de wet inzake auteursrecht en ander toepasselijk recht En de projector gebruikt softwaremodules die staan geregistreerd als freeware volgens GNU General Public License Version 2 en GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 van Free Software Foundation Inc VS of gebruiksrechtovereenkomsten voor elke software Raadpleeg de volgende webpagina voor de gebruiksrechtovereenkomsten betreffende zulke softwaremodules en andere software Webpagina http www viewsonic com products pro9500 htm Neem contact op met uw dealer voor inlichtingen betreffende software
270. nterliegen dem Urheberrecht und dem geistigen Eigentumsrecht von uns Die obigen Rechte sind durch das Urheberschutzgesetz und anderes geltendes Recht gesch tzt Zudem verwendet der Projektor Softwaremodule die unter GNU General Public License Version 2 und GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 der Free Software Foundation Inc USA bzw unter den Lizenzvereinbarungen f r die einzelnen Softwaremodule als Freeware lizenziert sind Informationen zu den Lizenzvereinbarungen f r derartige Softwaremodule und sonstige Software finden Sie auf der folgenden Webseite URL http www viewsonic com products pro9500 htm Wenden Sie sich bei Fragen zu Lizenzsoftware an Ihren Vertragsh ndler Detaillierte Informationen die den Lizenzbedingungen finden Sie in den Lizenzvereinbarungen der jeweiligen Software auf den folgenden Seiten sowie den Lizenzvereinbarungen der jeweiligen Software auf der Webseite Da die folgenden Lizenzvereinbarungen durch Dritte festgelegt wurden sind sie im englischen Original wiedergegeben Da das Programm das Softwaremodul kostenfrei bereitgestellt wird erfolgt die Bereitstellung in gesetzlich zul ssigem Umfang ohne Mangelgewahr und ohne Gew hrleistung in irgendeiner Form weder ausdr cklich noch stillschweigend Wir schlieRen in gesetzlich zulassigem Umfang jede Haftung f r Verluste irgendeiner Art einschlieRlich jedoch nicht beschr nkt auf den Verlust von Daten Genauigkeit oder Kompatibilitat mit and
271. ntos relacionados com o software Os direitos acima est o protegidos pela lei de direitos de autor e outras leis aplic veis E o projector utiliza m dulos de software licenciados como freeware de acordo com GNU General Public License Version 2 e GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 estabelecidas pela Free Software Foundation Inc E U A ou contratos de licen a para cada software POR Consulte a p gina de Internet seguinte para contratos de licen a para tais m dulos de software e outro software Endere o da p gina de Internet http www viewsonic com products pro9500 htm Em caso de d vidas contacte o seu revendedor relativamente ao software licenciado Consulte os contratos de licenga de cada software nas p ginas seguintes e contratos de licen a de cada software na p gina de Internet para detalhes sobre as condi es da licen a e assim por diante Uma vez que os contratos de licen a seguintes sao estabelecidos por terceiros estes sao declarados no ingl s original Uma vez que o programa m dulo de software licenciado gratuitamente o programa fornecido tal como est sem qualquer tipo de garantia expressa ou impl cita at ao limite permitido pela lei aplic vel E n o nos responsabilizamos nem compensamos por qualquer tipo de perda incluindo mas nao limitado a perda de dados perda de precis o ou perda de compatibilidade com a interface entre outros programas pelo software em quest o e ou utiliza
272. o ON it is necessary to enter the security code as follows when turning on the projector In DUAL mode both projectors will turn on Enter the security code for the projector that is locked by the security function ALTERNATE mode if the projector locked by the security function is due to turn on according to the ALTERNATE mode setting only that projector will turn on Otherwise both projectors will turn on Enter the security code for the projector that is locked by the security function After the security lock is released one of the projectors will turn off if both projectors are turned on ViewSonic 246 Pro9500 4 EXO To superimpose two images onto one screen the same image must be input to the Main and Sub projectors There are various methods to input the image to the projectors This chapter describes the ways of connecting the cables Read this chapter to find a method that meets your needs NOTE If Simple Stack without an RS 232C connection is used the Main and Sub projectors described below do not exist Main in this chapter is read as one projector and Sub as the other projector For details on the specifications of the input ports refer to Connecting with your devices Operating Guide Setting up and Connection to the ports Operating Guide Technical 4 1 Connecting an RS 232C cable If you are using Intellectual Stack connect an RS 232C cross cable between the RS 232C
273. o control the projectors use the LAN connection that is connected to any of the projectors When Intellectual Stack is used the operations or settings of some functions are restricted Refer to this manual for details ViewSonic 224 Pro9500 Introduction General installation AWARNING gt Install the projector where you can access the power outlet easily gt Do not subject the projector to unstable conditions Install the projector in a stable horizontal position Do not use any mounting accessories except the accessories specified by the manufacturer Read and keep the manuals of the accessories used For special installation such as ceiling mounting be sure to consult your dealer beforehand Specific mounting accessories and services may be required gt Do not install the projector near thermally conductive or flammable things gt Do not place the projector where any oils such as cooking or machine are used gt Do not place the projector in place where it may get wet ANCAUTION P Place the projector in a cool place with sufficient ventilation Keep a space of 30 cm or more between a side of the projector and other objects such as a wall If you install two projectors in Style 2 keep a space of 30 cm or more between the two projectors Do not stop up block nor cover the projector s vent holes Do not place the projector at places that are exposed to magnetic fields doing so can cause
274. o highlight MAIN SUB or OFF OFF Disables Intellectual Stack MAIN Sets the projector to Main that functions as a control tower SUB Sets the projector to Sub that functions as a follower 3 Press the lt button to return to the previous menu or press the button to complete the setting NOTE After setting Main or Sub the setting information can be checked on Web Control Network Guide Web Control Select Projector Status in the main menu of Web Control The Stack Mode item shows whether your projector is set to MAIN or SUB even if STACK MODE is set to OFF MAIN ViewSonic 238 Pro9500 STACK menu settings 3 3 Selecting lamp operation mode Select the DUAL or ALTERNATE lamp operation mode 1 Highlight LAMP MODE in the STACK menu with dae the A V buttons then press the gt button to QUEE display the LAMP MODE dialog 2 Use the A Y buttons in the dialog to highlight DUAL or ALTERNATE DUAL Turns on the projectors at the same time ALTERNATE Turns on the projectors alternately 3 Press the lt button to return to the previous menu or press the gt button to complete the setting NOTE If DUAL is selected a menu to select MAIN or SUB appears screen when a button on the control panel of the projector or remote control is pressed Select the projector that you want to operate Refer to the examples below When the MENU button is pressed a menu to select MAIN or SUB is displ
275. o use in the list and click the Next N My Connection Then proceed to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method Next gt Exit NOTE If you select the wireless LAN the wireless LAN adapters in your computer are shown in the list If the wired LAN is selected the wired LAN adapters in your computer are shown Troubleshooting B Are you sure that you want to turn on the network adapter The screen is displayed in the case that the selected network adapter is invalid To turn it on click the Yes and then proceed to item 1 5 Not to turn it on click the No and then the Screen is back to the previous one to select another network adapter Projector Connection Are you sure that you want to turn on the network adapter ViewSonic 114 Pro9500 1 4 Selecting the network connection mode continued W A network connection was not established The screen is displayed in the case that the network connection was nat established projector is not connected with a LAN cable Please check the network connection to your computer when the wired LAN is selected Be sure that the projector is connected with a LAN cable to your computer Click the OK then the screen is back to the previous one to select the network connection mode ViewSonic 115 Pro9500 1 4 Selecting the network connection mode continued 1 4 2 Selecting My Connection Select the
276. off when the button is pressed for more than 3 seconds And pressing the button does not turn on the Main or Sub projector e The Main projector is capable of receiving the remote control signals but not the Sub projector so the remote control should be pointed at the Main projector e wired remote control is used connect the cable to the Main projector instead of the Sub projector e For simple PC mouse amp keyboard functions connect both the Main and Sub projectors to your computer with USB cables Operating Guide Using as a simple PC mouse amp keyboard e AUTO SEARCH function is disabled when the projector is used in Intellectual Stack e Network communication to Sub and Web Control on Sub cannot turn on the Sub projector The Sub projector can only be controlled through the Main projector e Remote Control function on Web Control of the Sub projector is disabled Network Guide 3 11 Remote Control e f you try to turn on the projectors using the Power on amp Display on feature on the Messenger function the projectors will exit Intellectual Stack and display the specified message To start Intellectual Stack again re select MAIN SUB on both projectors in the STACK MODE dialog or turn off and on both projectors again e The Main and Sub projectors have the following common settings Muting feature Operating Guide Temporarily muting the sound Magnifying feature Operating Guide Using the magnify feature
277. og for adding a Network configuration when you connect your computer to the projector It is turned off by default Optimize Performance The LiveViewer captures computer screen in JPEG data and sends the JPEG data to the projector The LiveViewer has two options that have different compression rate of JPEG data Transmission speed Speed takes priority over Image quality It makes JPEG compression rate higher The screen on the projector is rewritten quicker because the transferred data is smaller but the image quality is worse Image quality Image quality takes priority over Speed It makes JPEG compression rate lower The screen on the projector is rewritten slower because the transferred data is larger but the image quality is better ViewSonic 145 Pro9500 2 1 Using the LiveViewer continued G Presenter Mode In the Single PC mode the projector can be occupied by one computer and can block an access from any other computer if the Presenter mode is selected in the LiveViewer While making your presentation you don t need to worry that the image on screen is unexpectedly switched to an image sent by another computer If you want to turn it on put a check mark in the check box NOTE If the Multi PC mode is selected the setting for the Presenter mode is invalid When switching from the Multi PC mode to the Single PC mode the Presenter mode setting of the computer is valid The Presenter Mo
278. ojector does not send out any data from the CONTROL port This menu is available only when the NETWORK BRIDGE is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE and the HALF DUPLEX is selected for the TRANSMISSION METHOD OFF is selected as the default setting STACK Selecting this item displays the STACK menu For more information please see Instant Stack Guide 65 Pro9500 Description SERVICE continued ViewSonic INFORMATION Selecting this item displays a dialog titled INPUT INFORMATION It shows the information about the current input e INPUT _INFORMATION e INPUT_INF COMPUTER IN 1 S VIDEO 1024 x 768 860Hz PAL ME LOCK AUTO SYRETURN S RETURN FRAME LOCK message on the dialog means the frame lock function is working The SCART RGB message means the COMPONENT ports is working as a SCART RGB input port Please refer to the COMPONENT item in INPUT menu This item can t be selected for no signal and sync out When the MY TEXT DISPLAY is set to ON the MY TEXT is displayed together with the input information in the INPUT INFORMATION box FACTORY RESET Selecting OK using the button performs this function By this function all the items in all of menus will collectively return to the initial setting Note that the items LAMP TIME FILTER TIME LANGUAGE FILTER MESSAGE NETWORK and SECURITY settings are not reset CANCEL OK 66 Pro9500
279. olbar select All Programs and then select the Projector Tools folder 2 The LiveViewer will appear in that folder if the installation was successful ViewSonic 111 LiveViewer InstallShield Wizard License Agreement Please read the folowing license agreement carefully License Agreement Hitachi Consumer Electronics Co Ltd To the Customer User Be sune w read the care Agreement taling f this se License Agree e dioe License Agreement you NOT tl and or soft 1 You may use this software under the tems ofthis License Agreement L accept ihe terms of the license agreement O I do not accept the terms of the license agreement LiveViewer InstallShield Wizard Choose Destination Location Select folder where setup wil install Setup wil install LiveViewer in the following folder Toinstal to this folder click To install to a diferent folder click Browse and select another folder Destination Folder C Program Files Projector Tooks LiveViewer LiveViewer InstallShield Wizard Select Program Folder Please select a program folder Soup wil add proram icons tothe Queue E Mpa AE name or select one from the exis to continue LiveViewer InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete The InstallShield Wizard has successfuly installed LiveViewer Before you can use the program you must restart your computer O AIT O No Lei restart my compu
280. ollowing items form web browser when command control is used Port Settings Network Control Port1 Port 23 Port open Click the Enable check box to open Network Control Port 23 to use 23 Default setting is Enable Authentication Click the Enable check box for the Authentication setting when authentication is required Default setting is Disable Network Control Port2 Port 9715 Port open Click the Enable check box to open Network Control Port2 Port 9715 to use TCP 9715 Default setting is Enable Authentication Click the Enable check box for the Authentication setting when authentication is required Default setting is Enable When the authentication setting is enabled the following settings are required Security Settings Network Control Authentication Password Re enter Authentication Password Enter the desired authentication password This setting will be the same for Network Control Port1 Port 23 and Network Control Port2 Port 9715 Default setting is blank ViewSonic 200 Pro9500 Command control settings TCP 23 1 Command format Same as RS 232C communication refer to RS 232C Communicaton command format 2 Response code Error code h shows hexadecimal Four of the response error code used for TCP 23 are the same as RS 232C Communication 1 4 One authentication error
281. on BAUD RATE 19200bps 38400bps NOTE For connecting the projector to your devices please read the manual for each devices and connect them correctly with suitable cables Turn off the power of both the projector and other devices and unplug beore connecting them For details of Transmission method refer to 6 4 Transmission method in the Network Guide ViewSonic 204 Pro9500 8522326 COomMmmUnNicatiom Network commandi table Command Data Names Operation Type Header CRC Action Type Setting code Sat Turn off BE EF 03 06 00 2A D3 01 00 00 60 00 00 Turn on BE EF 03 06 00 D2 01 00 00 60 01 00 Power BE EF 03 06 00 19 D3 02 00 00 60 00 00 Get Example return 00 00 01 00 02 00 Off On Cool down COMPUTER BE EF 03 06 00 FE D2 01 00 00 20 00 00 COMPUTER 2 BE EF 03 06 00 DO 01 00 00 20 04 00 HDMI BEEF 03 06 00 OE 02 01 00 00 20 03 00 COMPONENT EF 03 06 00 AE D1 01 00 00 20 05 00 S Set S VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 9E D3 01 00 00 20 02 00 put source VIDEO 06 6 D3 0020 0100 USB BEEF 03 06 00 01 01 00 00 20 06 00 LAN BEEF 03 06 00 CE 05 01 00
282. on the projector Yes No NOTE If there are already 10 profile data the check box cannot be checked Please erase one of the existing profile data The profile name for the stored data is assigned by the LiveViewer automatically The name will be shown at the right side of the check box ViewSonic 140 Pro9500 2 Network Bresentation 2 1 Using the LiveViewer When you get the connection between your projector and computer the LiveViewer main menu will be shown on the computer screen On the main menu you can configure settings and operate functions to send your images to the projector 2 1 1 Main menu and Operating buttons 1 Menu Type There are 2 type of the main menu Easy type and Advanced type which can be switched on screen When the network connection is not established the Advanced type will be on Screen Easy Type Advanced Type Status Display o Switch to Switch to Advanced type Easy type LS lt Indicator lt 2 Operating buttons Starting Capture button The transmission to the projector is started and the images will be displayed The Display mode will be the Single PC mode at first Q Stop button The image transmission is stopped NOTE images may not be displayed on screen if the Start Stop buttons are clicked repeatedly The primary image is displayed in multi display environment Vie
283. once the application software is closed ViewSonic 123 Pro9500 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued W Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector The message is appeared when the wireless adapter you selected is already used for another network connection Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector To connect click the Yes Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination Not to connect click the No then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed even though the network is not established Click on the main menu to go back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method ViewSonic 124 Pro9500 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued 3 Configuring manually After entering the Passcode you are required to enter the network configuration manually if you use a Subnet mask other than Class A B or C Wireless LAN The projector is required to be connected to an access point by a LAN cable 1 The setting on the access point 1 Enter the following information Enter the following information ssp SSID WirelessAccessPoint example pce Encryption WEP64bit example Subnet mask Encryption key 2 example 2 The setting on the projector 3 Enter the following information Subnet mask 4 255 255 255 128 example 3 Click the Connect
284. onds Also please note that it may not function correctly with some input When this function is performed for a video signal a certain extra such as a line may appear outside a picture When this function is performed for a computer signal a black frame may be displayed on the edge of the screen depending on the PC model The items adjusted by this function may vary when the FINE or DISABLE is selected for the AUTO ADJUST item of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu 41 Pro9500 1 9 ADVANCED MENU 3 SELECT From the INPUT menu items shown in the table PICTURE m PROGRESSIVE TV below can be performed D Select item using the cursor buttons and UN VIDEOFORMAT O press the cursor button or ENTER button to aono o execute the item Then perform it according to the sran Fo n following table EXIT COMPUTER IN 1 1024 x 768 Q60Hz Description PROGRESSIVE VIDEO NR COLOR SPACE COMPONENT Using the A V buttons switches the progress mode TV gt FILM amp OFF This function works only for a video signal s video signal component video signal of 4801 60 or 576i 50 or 10801 50 60 and an HDMI signal of 480i 60 or 576i 50 or 10801 50 60 When TV or FILM is selected the screen image will be sharp FILM adapts to the 2 3 Pull Down conversion system But these may cause a certain defect for example jag
285. or this product in mainland China Hong Kong Macao and Taiwan Excluded is subject to the terms and conditions of the Maintenance Guarantee Card For users in Europe and Russia full details of warranty provided can be found in www viewsoniceurope com under Support Warranty Information 4 3 Projector Warranty PRJ LWO1 Rev 1h 06 25 07 ViewSonic 281 Pro9500 Mexico Limited Warranty VIEWSONIC PROJECTOR What the warranty covers ViewSonic warrants its products to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use during the warranty period If a product proves to be defective in material or workmanship during the warranty period ViewSonic will at its sole option repair or replace the product with a like product Replacement product or parts may include remanufactured or refurbished parts or components amp accessories How long the warranty is effective 3 years for all parts excluding the lamp 3 years for labor 1 year for the original lamp from the date of the first consumer purchase Lamp warranty subject to terms and conditions verification and approval Applies to manufacturer s installed lamp only All accessory lamps purchased separately are warranted for 90 days Who the warranty protects This warranty is valid only for the first consumer purchaser What the warranty does not cover 1 Any product on which the serial number has been defaced modified or removed 2 Damage deterioration or malfunction res
286. ording to the following table RUSO WEG Item Description BRIGHTNESS Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the brightness Dark lt gt Light Using the A Y buttons switches the gamma mode 1 DEFAULT lt gt 1 CUSTOM lt gt 2 DEFAULT 2 CUSTOM lt gt DEFAULT 6 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 6 DEFAULT 5 CUSTOM lt gt 5 DEFAULT lt gt 4 CUSTOM lt 4 DEFAULT To adjust CUSTOM Selecting a mode whose name includes CUSTOM and then pressing the button or the ENTER button dialog to aid you in adjusting the mode z This function is useful when you want to change the brightness of particular tones Choose an item using the lt P gt buttons and adjust the level using the A Y buttons You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your adjustment by pressing the ENTER button Each time you press the ENTER button the pattern changes as below No pattern gt Gray scale of 9 steps Ramp lt Gray scale of 15 steps The eight equalizing bars correspond to eight tone levels of the test pattern Gray scale of 9 steps except the darkest in the left end If you want to adjust the 2nd tone from left end on the test pattern use the equalizing adjustment bar 1 The darkest tone at the left end of the test pattern cannot be controlled with any of equalizing adjustment bar Lines or other noise might appear on the mm screen when this function is operated but it is no
287. ot take any responsibility or compensate for loss of any kind including but not limited to loss of data loss of accuracy or loss of compatibility with interface between other programs by the software concerned or and use of the software concerned to the extent permitted by applicable law ViewSonic 258 Pro9500 ENGLISH Accord de licence d utilisateur final pour le logiciel du projecteur FRAN Le logiciel de ce projecteur est compos de plusieurs modules logiciels ind pendants avec des droits d auteurs nous appartenant et ou appartenant des tiers pour chacun desdits modules logiciels Le projecteur utilise galement des modules logiciels que nous avons mis au point et ou produits Nous d tenons galement des droits d auteur et de propri t intellectuelle pour chacun desdits logiciels et des l ments connexes y compris mais sans s y limiter pour les documents relatifs aux logiciels Les droits susmentionn s sont prot g s par la l gislation sur le copyright et d autres lois applicables Et le projecteur utilise les modules de logiciel accord s en licence en tant que logiciel libre sous GNU General Public License Version 2 et GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 tablis par Free Software Foundation Inc tats Unis ou autres accords de licence pour chaque logiciel Consultez la page Web suivante pour les accords de licence pour lesdits modules logiciels et d autres logiciels Adresse de la page Web http
288. ple if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with a two step method 1 we copyright the library and 2 we offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library To protect each distributor we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library Also if the library is modified by someone else and passed on the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version so that the original author s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others Finally software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder Therefore we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license Most GNU software including some libraries is cove
289. please change the lamp referring to the section Replacing the lamp Blinking In Red Or Lighting In Red Blinking In Red The lamp cover has not been properly fixed Please turn the power off and allow the projector to cool down at least 45 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation of the attachment state of the lamp cover After performing any needed maintenance turn the power on again If the same indication is displayed after the remedy please contact your dealer or service company Blinking In Red Or Lighting In Red Blinking In Red Continued on next page ViewSonic The cooling fan is not operating Please turn the power off and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation that no foreign matter has become caught in the fan etc and then turn the power on again If the same indication is displayed after the remedy please contact your dealer or service company 100 Pro9500 Regarding the indicator lamps continued POWER LAMP TEMP indicator indicator indicator Description There is a possibility that the interior portion has become heated Please turn the power off and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation of the following items and then turn the power on a
290. ports on the Main and Sub projectors This connection is not required if you are using Simple Stack NOTE If the RS 232C cable connecting the two projectors operating in Intellectual Stack is disconnected the projectors will exit from Intellectual Stack and start to operate individually Intellectual Stack will not restart even if the cable is reconnected Follow the procedures below to restart Intellectual Stack 1 Do not operate the projectors for more than 10 seconds after disconnecting the cable to allow the projectors to recognize the disconnection of the cable 2 Turn off both projectors and allow them to cool sufficiently 3 Reconnect the two projectors with the RS 232C cable and turn them on again Intellectual Stack will restart ViewSonic 247 Pro9500 Connecting cables 4 2 Connecting signal cables There are two methods to input image to the Sub projector Inputting image from the MONITOR OUT port on Main to Sub Inputting image to Sub and Main individually Inputting image from Main to Sub 1 Connect the MONITOR OUT port on Main to the COMPUTER IN1 port on Sub with Y Cbb computer cable 2 Connect the image output device to one of the input ports on Main oor NOTES for Intellectual Stack COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 can be used as the input port for the Main projector in Intellectual Stack
291. projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation of the attachment state of the lamp and lamp cover and then turn the power on again Shutting the projector down Only when the projector can not be turned off by usual procedure please push the shutdown switch using a pin or similar and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet Before turning it on again wait at least 10 minutes to make the projector cool down enough Resetting all settings When it is hard to correct some wrong settings the FACTORY RESET function of SERVICE item in OPTION menu can reset all settings except settings such as LANGUAGE LAMP TIME FILTER TIME FILTER MESSAGE SECURITY and NETWORK to the factory default ViewSonic 101 Pro9500 Shutdown switch Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects About the phenomenon confused with a machine defect check and cope with it according to the following table Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect Reference page Power does not come on Neither sounds nor pictures are outputted The electrical power cord is not plugged in Correctly connect the power cord 15 The main power source has been interrupted during operation such as by a power outage blackout etc Please disconnect the power plug from the power outlet and allow the projector to cool down at least 10 minutes then turn the power on again Either there is no lamp
292. purpose and brought together as the ADVANCED MENU Each of these menus is operated using the same methods While the projector is displaying any menu the MENU button on the projector works as the cursor buttons The basic operations of these menus are as follows POSITION button gy MENU button ENTER button ka Cursor buttons ESC butt h Cursor utton sc er o buttons RESET button 1 or ADVANCED will appear EASY MENU has priority to appear just after powered on 2 In the EASY MENU 1 Use the A Y cursor buttons to select an item to operate If you want to change it to the ADVANCED MENU select the ADVANCED MENU 2 Use the lt gt cursor buttons to operate the item i In the ADVANCED MENU YF TWER BRIGHTNESS 0 1 Use the cursor buttons to select a menu 2 Dna If you want to change to the EASY MENU 2 a z select the EASY MENU ACTE R The items in the menu appear on the right side x 2 Press the gt cursor button or ENTER button to move the cursor to the right side Then use the cursor buttons to select an item to operate and press the cursor button or ENTER button to progress The operation menu or dialog of the selected item will appear 3 Use the buttons as instructed in the OSD to operate the item 4 PRESENTATION ACTIVE IRIS 9 MY MEMORY continued on next page ViewSonic 32 Pro9500 Using the menu funct
293. r as shown on the right Press the Next 1 us The InctalShield Wizard wil install LiveViewer on your computer To continue Next ViewSonic 110 Pro9500 1 2 Installing the LiveViewer continued 8 The License Agreement dialog appears If you accept it select I accept the terms of the license agreement and press the Next 9 The Choose Destination Location dialog appears Press the Next NOTE C Program Files Projector Tools LiveViewer folder will be created and the program will be installed into that folder If you wish to install to a different folder click the Browse and select another folder 10 Confirm the program folder name If Projector Tools is okay press the Next to continue If not enter the desired folder name and then press the Next 1 Windows XP The Hardware Installation dialog appears if you are using Windows XP Press Continue Anyway Windows Vista or Windows 7 The Windows Security dialog will appear if you are using Windows Vista or Windows 7 Please click the Install this driver software anyway and continue installation 12 After a moment installation will complete and the Setup Complete dialog will appear as shown on the right Click the Finish This completes the software installation Then your computer automatically restarts 1 To confirm that the software has been properly installed press the Start button on the to
294. r so that the bottom is facing 3 There is a raised dot near the battery cover at the bottom of the projector Turn the cover in the direction indicated OPEN to position one end of the slit on the cover with the dot using a coin or the like And then pick the cover up to remove it 4 Pry up the battery using a flathead screwdriver or the like to take it out While prying it up put a finger lightly on the battery since it may pop out of the holder 5 Replace with a new battery of the specified type With the plus side facing up slide the battery under the claw 2 of the spring fitting And press down on the battery until it snaps into place 6 Replace the battery cover in place then turn it in the EN direction indicated CLOSE to position the knob of the cover with the dot on the bottom case to fix the cover using a coin or the like Battery ANWARNING p Be careful of handling a battery as a battery can cause explosion cracking or leakage which could result in a fire an injury and environment pollution Use only the specified and perfect battery Do not use a battery with damage such as a scratch dent rust or leakage When replacing the battery replace it with a new battery When a battery leaked wipe the leakage out well with a waste cloth If the leakage adhered to your body immediately rinse it well with water When a battery leaked in the battery holder replace the batteries after wiping th
295. r uses a high pressure mercury glass lamp The lamp can break with a loud bang or burn out if jolted or scratched handled while hot or worn over time Note that each lamp has a different lifetime and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them In addition if the bulb bursts it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing and for gas containing mercury and dust containing fine particles of glass to escape from the projector s vent holes gt About disposal of a lamp This product contains a mercury lamp do not put itin a trash Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws For lamp recycling go to www lamprecycle org in the US For product disposal consult your local government agency or www eiae org in the US or www epsc ca in Canada For more information call your dealer If the lamp should break it will make a loud bang when it does unplug the power cord from the outlet and make sure to request a replacement lamp from your local dealer Note that shards of glass could damage the projector s internals or cause injury during handling so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself If the lamp should break it will make a loud bang when it does ventilate the Disconnect room well and make sure not to inhale the gas or fine particles that come out from the projector s vent holes and not to get them into your eyes or mouth newer gt
296. racter is selected Then follow the same procedure as described at the item 2 above 4 To finish entering text move the cursor to the OK on screen and press the gt ENTER or INPUT button To revert to the previous MY TEXT without saving changes move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and press the 4 ENTER or INPUT button The MY TEXT WRITING function is available only when the MY TEXT PASSWORD function is set to OFF Selecting this item displays the SECURITY INDICATOR dialog Use the A Y buttons to select ON or OFF ON lt gt OFF When ON is selected while PIN LOCK or TRANSITION DETECTOR is ON the SECURITY indicator blinks in the standby state 0073 74 Selecting this item displays the STACK LOCK dialog For more information STACK LOCK please see Instant Stack Guide ViewSonic 79 Pro9500 MY TEXT DISPLAY ON S RETURN NOU MY TEXT DISPLAY ALL CLEAR SET DELETE SECURITY INDICATOR Presentatiomteols The projector has the following two convenient tools that enable on screen presentations easily and quickly PC LESS Presentation USB Display PC LESS Presentation The PC LESS Presentation reads image data from storage media inserted into the USB TYPE A port and displays the image on the following modes The PC LESS Presentation can be started by selecting the USB TYPE A port as the input source This feature allows you to make your presentations without using your computer Thumbnail mode
297. rademarks of VESA PS 2 VGA and XGA are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation Disclaimer ViewSonic Corporation shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages resulting from furnishing this material or the performance or use of this product In the interest of continuing product improvement ViewSonic Corporation reserves the right to change product specifications without notice Information in this document may change without notice No part of this document may be copied reproduced or transmitted by any means for any purpose without prior written permission from ViewSonic Corporation Product Registration To meet your future needs and to receive any additional product information as it becomes available please register your product on the Internet at www viewsonic com The ViewSonic Wizard CD ROM also provides an opportunity for you to print the registration form which you may mail or fax to ViewSonic For Your Records Product Name Pro9500 ViewSonic LCD Projector Model Number 513835 Document Number Pro9500 UG ENG Rev 1A 11 02 10 Serial Number Purchase Date Personal Identification Number PIN Product disposal at end of product life The lamp in this product contains mercury which can be dangerous to you and the environment Please use care and dispose of in accordance with local state or federal laws V
298. red by the ordinary GNU General Public License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain designated libraries and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free programs When program is linked with a library whether statically or using a shared library the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work a derivative of the original library The ViewSonic 275 ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary General Public License It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non free programs These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries However the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances For example on rare occasions there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto standard To achieve this non free programs must be allowed to use the library A more frequent case is that a free library does
299. rement BE EF 03 06 00 8F DO 04 00 20 00 00 Decrement EF 03 06 00 D1 05 00 20 00 00 KEYSTONE Execute EF 03 06 00 98 D8 06 00 20 70 00 00 Reset Set Disable BE EF 03 06 00 FE 88 01 00 20 21 00 00 PERFECT FIT Enable BE EF 03 06 00 6E 89 01 00 20 21 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 CD 88 02 00 20 21 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 31 89 02 00 21 21 00 00 Increment BE EF 03 06 00 57 89 04 00 21 21 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 86 88 05 00 21 21 00 00 continued on next page ViewSonic 210 Pro9500 Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code Get EF 03 06 00 75 89 02 00 22 21 00 00 Increment EF 03 06 00 13 89 04 00 22 21 00 00 P Decrement EF 03 06 00 C2 88 05 00 22 21 00 00 Get EF 03 06 00 89 88 02 00 23 21 00 00 8 Increment EF 03 06 00 EF 88 04 00 23 21 00 00 9 P Decrement EF 03 06 00 89 05 00 23 21 00 00 Get EF 03 06 00 FD 89 02 00 24 21 00 00 poss 2 Increment BE EF 03 06 00 9B 89 04 00 24 21 00 00 9 P Decrement EF 03 06 00 4A 88 05 00 24 21 00 00 Get EF 03 06 00 01 88 02 00 25 21 00 00 Increm
300. resenting by another to is occupied by another computer in the user You cannot connect with this projector unti the other session Presenter Mode is finished Presenter mode Click the OK then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed in stand by mode Retry to send your images after the Presenter mode is off ViewSonic 134 Pro9500 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination continued W A Slideshow is currently running on the projector that you are trying to display to The projector you want to send your images Slideshow is currently running on the projector that you to is in the Slideshow mode in the PC LESS are tryng to dsplay to PCLess Presentation Mod If you continue you will cancel the current Slideshow Presentation Click the Yes then the projector will stop the Slideshow and switch the input source to the LAN port Click the No then the projector is remained in the Slideshow mode and the LiveViewer main menu is displayed in stand by mode on your computer Are you sure you want to change the input channel of the Projector to LAN The projector is not set to the LAN as an input signal Lan Click the Yes then the projector is switched to the LAN Click the No then the projector is remained as it is and the LiveViewer main menu is displayed in stand by mode on your computer ViewSonic 135 Pro9500 1
301. river should be updated to the latest If any application software having the firewall function is installed into you computer make the firewall function invalid with following the user s manual ViewSonic 109 Pro9500 1 2 Installing the LiveViewer 1 2 1 Installing the LiveViewer The LiveViewer software needs to be installed all the computers to connect to the projector through a network You need to log in as an administrator user to install the software 1 Turn on the computer 2 Shut down all applications 3 Insert the accompanying CD ROM into the computer s CD ROM drive 4 Click on the Start button on the toolbar and select the Run 5 Enter E Application LiveViewer LiveViewer_Setup exe and then press the OK If your CD ROM drive is not drive E on your computer you will need to replace E with the correct drive letter assigned to your CD ROM drive 6 After a moment the Choose Setup Language Choose Setup Language E Select the language for the installation from i dialog will appear as shown on the right Select what you like to use in the list and click the OK the choices below n If the software has been already installed Uninstallation will be done Click the Cancel button then uninstallation will be canceled If you uninstalled the software by miss operation please re install the software from first procedure 7 After a moment the Welcome dialog will appea
302. rk Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under terms of your choice provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License You must supply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copyright notices you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things Pro9500 License Agreement the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with
303. s Do not place anything around the projector that could be sucked in or stuck to the projector s intake vents Do not place the projector at places that are exposed to magnetic fields doing so can cause the cooling fans inside the projector to malfunction gt Avoid placing the projector in smoky humid or dusty place Placing the projector in such places could cause a fire an electric shock and malfunction of the projector Do not place the projector near humidifiers Especially for an ultrasonic humidifier chlorine and minerals contained in tap water are atomized and could be deposited in the projector causing image degradation or other problems Do not place the projector in a smoking area kitchen passageway or by the window NOTICE Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the projector s remote sensor Do not place the product in a place where radio interference may be caused Check and correct the setting for FAN SPEED of SERVICE in the OPTION menu according to the usage environment If the projector is used with a wrong setting it may cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside Keep heat sensitive things away from the projector Otherwise they may be damaged by the heat from the projector ViewSonic 12 Pro9500 Connecting with your devices Before connecting the projector to a device consult the manual of the device to confirm that the device is suitable for connecting with
304. s not required 10 Click the Apply button to save the settings ViewSonic 184 Pro9500 7 3 Event Scheduling The scheduling function enables to setup scheduled events including power on power off It enables to be self management projector NOTE You can schedule the following control events Power Input Source My Image Messenger Slideshow The power on off event has the lowest priority among the all events that are defined at the same time There are 3 types of Scheduling 1 daily 2 weekly 3 specific date The priority for scheduled events is as follows 1 specific date 2 weekly 3 daily Up to five specific dates are available for scheduled events Priority is given to those with the lower numbers when more than one event has been scheduled for the same date and time e g Specific date No 1 has priority over Specific date No 2 and so on Be sure to set the date and time before enabling scheduled events ViewSonic 185 Pro9500 7 3 Event Scheduling Continued Schedule Settings Schedule settings can be configured from a web browser Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Schedule Settings on the main menu and select the required schedule item For example if you want to perform the command every Sunday
305. s possible Do not use old used lamps this is a cause of breakage ViewSonic 93 Pro9500 Cleaning and replacing the air filter Please check and clean the air filter periodically When the indicators or a message prompts you to clean the air filter comply with it as soon as possible The air filter of this projector consists of a filter cover and a filter unit with two types of filter If one or both of the filters are damaged or heavily soiled replace the filter unit with a new one The specified filter unit also comes with a replacement lamp for this projector Please replace the filter unit as well when you replace the lamp 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power Allow the projector to sufficiently cool down Use a vacuum cleaner on and around the filter cover Pick and pull up the filter cover knobs to Filter cover take it off knobs Press up slightly the bottom side knobs to unlock the bottom side of the filter unit Pull Filter unit the center knob to take the filter unit off Use a vacuum cleaner for the filter vent of the projector and the outer side of the filter unit Oo Oc G N The filter unit consists of two parts Press knobs down around the interlocking parts to unlock then separate the two parts Interlocking Use a vacuum cleaner for the inner side of parts each part of the filter unit to clean them up If the filters are damaged or heavily soiled rep
306. s shown below Proposed Maximum N Actual Concentration Concentration Hexavalent Chromium cr Polybrominated biphenyls PBB Polybrominated diphenyl ethers PBDE 0 1 Certain components of products as stated above are exempted under the Annex of the RoHS Directives as noted below Examples of exempted components are 1 Mercury in compact fluorescent lamps not exceeding 5 mg per lamp and in other lamps not specifically mentioned in the Annex of RoHS Directive 2 Lead in glass of cathode ray tubes electronic components fluorescent tubes and electronic ceramic parts e g piezoelectronic devices 3 Lead in high temperature type solders i e lead based alloys containing 8596 by weight or more lead 4 Lead as an allotting element in steel containing up to 0 3596 lead by weight aluminium containing up to 0 4 lead by weight and as a cooper alloy containing up to 4 lead by weight ViewSonic iii Pro9500 Copyright Information Copyright ViewSonic Corporation 2010 All rights reserved Macintosh and Power Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Inc Microsoft Windows Windows NT and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries ViewSonic the three birds logo OnView ViewMatch and ViewMeter are registered trademarks of ViewSonic Corporation VESA is a registered trademark of the Video Electronics Standards Association DPMS and DDC are t
307. s the ENTER button on the remote control or INPUT button on the projector The following operations can be accessible while the Slideshow is displayed Button operation The keypad Web Remote Functions on the in web browser projector software ENTER INPUT ENTER Displays thumbnail The remote control These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed NOTE It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the Thumbnail screen Slideshow or Full Screen is displayed When the Slideshow mode is set to ONE TIME the last slide of the presentation will be held on screen till the ENTER button on the remote control or Web Remote Control or INPUT button on the projector is pushed ViewSonic 86 Pro9500 PC LESS Presentation continued You can play the Slideshow at your desired configuration Configure the Slideshow items in the Thumbnail 1 RETURN Returns to the thumbnail mode S 2 2 PLAY Play the Slideshow PLAY EXECUTE 3 START Set the beginning number of the Se Slideshow a 4 STOP Set the end number of the Slideshow 5 INTERVAL _ Set the interval time of the Slideshow It is not recommend to set the interval time very short something like several seconds because it may take more than several seconds to read and display an image file if it is stored in very deep layer directory or if so many files are stored in
308. s the horizontal Menu position BLANK Selects the Blank mode START UP Selects the start up screen mode MyScreen Lock Turns MyScreen lock function on off MESSAGE Turns the message function on off TEMPLATE Selects the template setting C C DISPLAY Selects Closed Caption DISPLAY setting C C MODE Selects Closed Caption MODE setting C C CHANNEL ViewSonic Selects Closed Caption CHANNEL setting 168 Pro9500 3 10 Projector Control Continued Item Description OPTION AUTO SEARCH Turns the automatic signal search function on off AUTO KEYSTONE Turns the automatic keystone distortion correction function on off DIRECT POWER ON Turns the direct power on function on off AUTO POWER OFF Configures the timer to shut off the projector when no signal is detected USB TYPEB Selects the USB TYPE B setting MY BUTTON 1 Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON 1 button on the included remote control MY BUTTON 2 Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON 2 button on the included remote control MY SOURCE Selects the My Source setting REMOTE FREQ NORMAL Turns the remote control signal frequency normal function on off REMOTE FREQ HIGH ViewSonic Turns the remote control signal frequency high function on off 169 Pro9500 3 10 Projector Control Continued Th
309. se distribution conditions are incompatible with these write to the author to ask for permission For Pro9500 License Agreement software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE 1 NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEI
310. se refer to the DIRECT POWER ON and AUTO POWER OFF items of the OPTION menu Use the shutdown switch only when the projector is not turned off by normal procedure ViewSonic 21 Pro9500 perating VOLUME button Adjusting the volume 1 Use the VOLUME VOLUME buttons to adjust the volume A dialog will appear on the screen to aid you in adjusting the volume If you do not do anything the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds 2 me e When X is selected for current picture input port the volume adjustment is disabled Please see AUDIO SOURCE item of AUDIO menu e Even if the projector is in the standby mode the volume is adjustable when both of the following conditions are true An option other than X is selected for STANDBY in the AUDIO SOURCE item of the AUDIO menu NORMAL is selected in the STANDBY MODE item of the SETUP menu e n the standby mode the volume of the microphone is adjustable with the VOLUME buttons on the remote control in synchronization with the volume of the projector MUTE button Temporarily muting the sound 1 _ Press MUTE button on the remote control A dialog will appear on the screen indicating that you have muted the sound To restore the sound press the MUTE VOLUME or VOLUME button Even if you do not do anything the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds e When is selected for current picture input port the sound is al
311. sed as a whole at no charge all third parties under the terms of this License If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and telling he user how to view a copy of this License Exception if he Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise t
312. ss the gt or ENTER button to display the MY TEXT DISPLAY on off menu 2 Use the A Y buttons on the MY TEXT DISPLAY on off menu to select on or off ON OFF When it is set ON the MY TEXT will be displayed on the START UP screen and the INPUT INPUT _INFORMATION INFORMATION when the INFORMATION on the 1024 x SERVICE menu is chosen This function is available only when the MY TEXT PASSWORD function is set to the OFF S RETURN fo 1 Use the A V buttons on the SECURITY menu to select the MY TEXT WRITING and press the gt button The MY TEXT WRITING dialog will be displayed 2 The current MY TEXT will be displayed ALGER on the first 3 lines If not yet written the CONTERIS sce lines will be blank Use the A lt P gt buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to select and enter characters To erase 1 character at one time press the RESET button or press the lt and INPUT button at the same time Also if you move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen MY TEXT and press the ENTER or INPUT button WRITING 1 character or all characters will be erased The MY TEXT can be input up to 24 characters on each line 3 To change an already inserted character press the A button to move the C ee cursor to one of the first 3 lines and use p E the lt gt buttons to move the cursor on the character to be changed After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button the cha
313. t a malfunction a continued on next page ViewSonic 36 Pro9500 Description COLOR TEMP Using the A Y buttons switches the color temperature mode 1HIGH 1CUSTOM 2MID 2CUSTOM 6 CUSTOM 3LOW 6 Hi BRIGHT 3 3 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM lt gt 5 2 4 CUSTOM lt gt 4 Hi BRIGHT 1 adjust CUSTOM Selecting a mode whose name includes E CUSTOM and then pressing the gt button or the ENTER button displays a dialog to aid you in adjusting the OFFSET and GAIN of the selected mode ENTER G3 TEST PATTERN OFFSET adjustments change the color intensity on the whole tones of the test pattern GAIN adjustments mainly affect color intensity on the brighter tones of the test pattern Choose an item using the lt gt buttons and adjust the level using the buttons You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your adjustment by pressing the ENTER button Each time you press the ENTER button the pattern changes as below No pattern gt Gray scale of 9 steps t Ramp Gray scale of 15 steps Lines or other noise might appear on the screen when this function is operated but it is not a malfunction Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the strength of whole color Weak lt gt Strong This item can be selected only for a video s video and component video signal For an HDMI signal this item can also be selected if either 1 or 2 applies 1 H
314. t image in the Slideshow This setting information will be saved in the playlist txt file Switch to ON to skip the selected image in the Slideshow This setting information will be saved in the playlist txt file Press the gt cursor button or ENTER to rotate the selected image 90 degrees clockwise This setting information will be saved in the playlist txt file 82 Pro9500 PC LESS Presentation continued Operating by the menu on the Thumbnail screen You can also control the images by using the menu on the Thumbnail screen Functions gt Moves to an upper folder Allows you to sort files and folders as following RETURN p m gt cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail Y RETURN gt cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail Be sure to use this function before removing USB storage device from the projector After that the projector will not recognize a USB storage device until you insert it again into the USB TYPE A input port REMOVE USB SORT ViewSonic 83 Pro9500 PC LESS Presentation continued NOTE These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed The Thumbnail mode shows 20 pictures in 1 page as maximum t is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the Thumbnail screen Slideshow or Full Screen is displayed Some error icons will be displayed in the Thumbnail This file seems to be brok
315. ted as the input Source continued on next page ViewSonic 103 Pro9500 Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects continued Reference page 28 Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect Video screen The FREEZE function is working display freezes Press FREEZE button to restore the screen to normal Color settings are not correctly adjusted Colors have Perform picture adjustments by changing the COLOR TEMP COLOR faded out TINT and or COLOR SPACE settings using the menu functions appearance or m tone is COLOR SPACE setting is not suitable poor Change the COLOR SPACE setting to AUTO RGB SMPTE240 REC709 or REC601 The brightness and or contrast are adjusted to an extremely low level Adjust BRIGHTNESS and or CONTRAST settings to a higher level using the menu function Pictures appear dark The projector is operating in Eco mode Set ECO MODE to NORMAL and set AUTO ECO MODE to OFF in the SETUP menu The lamp is approaching the end of its product lifetime Replace the lamp Either the focus and or horizontal phase settings are not properly adjusted Pictures appear Adjust the focus using the focus ring and or H PHASE blurry using the menu function The lens is dirty or misty Clean the lens referring to the section Caring for the lens When the projector is operating in Eco mode flickering may appear on screen Set ECO MODE
316. ted to the same network For the details of AMX Device Discovery visit the AMX web site URL http www amx com as of Aug 2010 continued on next page ViewSonic 70 Pro9500 Description Selecting this item displays the PRESENTATION menu Use A Y buttons to select one of the following items then press or ENTER button to use the function If you set a computer to the Presenter mode while its image is projected the projector is occupied by the computer and access from any other computer is blocked Use this function to quit the Presenter mode and QUIT allow other computers to access the projector PRESENTER Select this item to display a dialog MODE Press gt button to choose OK in the dialog The Presenter mode is cancelled and a message is displayed indicating the result make Presenter mode setting use LiveViewer For details see the section 2 2 2 Presenter mode in the Network Guide If you set one or more computers to the Multi PC mode on LiveViewer and send their images to the projector you can select the display mode on the projector from two options below Single PC mode displays the image of the selected MULTI PC computer on full screen MODE Multi PC mode displays the images sent from up to four computers on screen that is divided into quarter sections Select this item to display a dialog Use the dialog to change the display mode as explained below PRESENTATION
317. tellectual Stack NOTE If the Schedule is not executed an error message will be sent in accordance with the conditions set in Schedule Execution Error on Web Control Network Guide 3 Web Control 3 6 Alert Settings If the Schedule function is set to turn off the power when the projectors operating in Intellectual Stack both the Main and Sub projectors will be turned off If the Schedule function the Main projector is set to turn on the power the projectors will be turned on according to the LAMP MODE setting When the two projectors are operating in the DUAL mode and a menu is being displayed on one of the projectors the Schedule function for My Image and Messenger on the other projector will not be executed Power Off in the table refers to turning off the power and entering into standby mode according to the Intellectual Stack settings or by pressing the STANDBY ON button on the remote control or control panel of the Main projector The projectors cannot be turned on by the Schedule function on the Sub projector Set it on the Main projector if necessary When the Sub projector is turned off according to the ALTERNATE MODE setting the Schedule function on the Sub projector to turn off its power will be executed without error ViewSonic 255 Pro9500 7 Troubleshooting About the phenomenon confused with a machine defect check and cope with it according to the following table Phenomen
318. ter later Fomes ary ike for the dives andthe fk Frith to complete setup Pro9500 1 3 Process to connect the network Before connecting your computer and projector via a network make sure that the LAN port is selected as the input source on the projector Operating in the Operating Guide Otherwise a connection cannot be established 1 3 1 Process overview An overview of the process to connect your computer and the projector via a network is shown below The LiveViewer allows you to skip some of the steps below to establish network connection quickly and easily Selecting the network connection mode If My Connection is Wireless LAN selected Wired LAN My Connection Q Selecting the network connection method Enter PassCode If Enter PassCode or Configure Manually Select From List is Select From List selected G Manual configuration Profile If Profile or History is History selected Configure Network Settings Manually Configuring the network settings manually G Confirming the connection to your destination NOTE Wireless LAN can be selected only when an access point to convert wireless LAN to wired LAN exists between your computer and the projector Up to 30 computers can be simultaneously connected to the projector through a network ViewSonic 112 Pro9500 1 3 Process to connect the network continued 1 3 2 Starting the LiveViewer Start the LiveView
319. that displays a transcript or dialog of the audio portion of ER a video files other presentation or other V relevant sounds It is required to have NTSC format video or 480i 60 format component video source supporting C C feature to utilize this function It may not work properly depending on equipment or signal source In this case please turn off the Closed Caption DISPLAY Select Closed Caption DISPLAY setting from following options using A Y buttons AUTO lt gt ON lt gt OFF AUTO Closed Caption automatically displays when the volume is muted ON Closed Caption is on OFF Closed Caption is off The caption is not displayed when the OSD menu is active The Closed Caption is the function to display the dialogue narration and or sound effects of a television program or other video sources The Closed Caption availability is depending upon broadcaster and or content MODE Select Closed Caption MODE setting from following options using A Y buttons CAPTIONS lt gt TEXT CAPTIONS Display Closed Caption TEXT Display Text data which is for additional information such as news reports or a TV program guide The information covers the entire screen Not all of the C C program has Text information CHANNEL Select Closed Caption CHANNEL from following options using Y buttons 10220304 Channel 1 primary channel language Channel 2 Channel 3 4 Chann
320. the OPTION SERVICE COMMUNICATION menu The SAVING function is working Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu The NETWORK BRIDGE function is turned off Select NETWORK BRIDGE for COMMUNICATION TYPE item in the OPTION SERVICE COMMUNICATION menu The SAVING function is working Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu Disconnect the LAN cable and check that the projector is working properly If this phenomenon occurs after connecting to the network there may be a loop between two Ethernet switching hubs within the network as explained below There are two or more Ethernet switching hubs in a network Two of the hubs are doubly connected by LAN cables This double connection forms a loop between the two hubs Such a loop may have an adverse effect on the projector as well as the other network devices Check the network connection and remove the loop by disconnecting the LAN cables such that there is only one connecting cable between two hubs The LiveViewer has been intentionally or accidentally forced to shut down DirectDraw or Direct3D has been disabled on your Windows Please refer to the Microsoft Help and Support home page on how to enable DirectDraw or Direct3D 12 NOTE Although bright spots or dark spots may appear on the screen this is a unique characteristic of liquid crystal displays and it does not constitute or impl ViewSonic a machine defect 1
321. the gt button functioning as EXIT _ FIXED COMPUTER IN 1 key after performing some changes to the set tings a confirmation dialog will appear e Pressing the button functioning as YES key in the dialog saves the setting and closes the dialog The screen becomes black while the setting is being applied Please wait for a while e Pressing the lt button functioning as NO key in the dialog closes the dialog without saving the setting SERVICE _ COMMUNICATION STACK ARE YOU SURE YOU WISH TO CHANGE STACK SETTING 9 O YES ViewSonic 243 Pro9500 STACK menu settings 3 7 Important information for Intellectual Stack This section provides important information for setting up the Main and Sub projectors not explanations on operating the menus Read all information carefully e To use Intellectual Stack one projector must be set to Main and the other set to Sub e When stacking the two projectors the control panel of the projector placed underneath cannot be operated It is therefore strongly recommended to set the projector underneath to Sub and the projector on top to Main e All buttons except the STANDBY ON button on the control panel of the Sub projector are disabled Operate the projectors with the control panel of the Main projector or the remote control e Pressing the STANDBY ON button of the Sub projector does not allow you to turn off only the Sub projector The Main and Sub projectors turn
322. the Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is understood that he user who changes the contents of definitions files in he Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with he Library A suitable mechanism is one that 1 uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user s computer system rather than copying library functions into he executable and 2 will operate properly with a modified version of the library if the user installs one as long as the modified version is interface compatible with the version hat the work was made with c Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at least hree years to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution d If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place e Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy For an executable the required form of the work that uses the Library must include an
323. the cooling fans inside the projector to malfunction gt Avoid placing the projector in smoky humid or dusty place Do not place the projector near humidifiers Especially for an ultrasonic humidifier chlorine and minerals contained in tap water are atomized and could be deposited in the projector causing image degradation or other problems NOTICE P Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the projector s remote sensor Do not place the product in a place where radio interference may be caused ViewSonic 225 Pro9500 Introduction 1 3 Basic information and preparations Instant Stack Instant Stack is a feature that allows you to superimpose images projected from two projectors easily This projector is designed to provide this feature with func tions to install two projectors and superimpose the images Intellectual Stack and Simple Stack Instant Stack includes the following two features When two projectors are connected via an RS 232C cable with necessary set tings performed on the projectors these two projectors will automatically operate in synchronization with each other according to the settings This is known as Intellectual Stack in this manual The two projectors operate individually without the RS 232C connection This is known as Simple Stack in this manual Remote control for Intellectual Stack and Simple Stack For Intellectual Stack one projector is set as Main and the other is set as
324. the feet can also tilt the projector in order to project at a suitable angle to the screen elevating the front side of the projector within 12 degrees This projector has 2 elevator feet and 2 elevator buttons An elevator foot is adjustable while pushing the elevator button on the same side as it 1 Holding the projector push the elevator buttons to To loose an loose the elevator feet elevator foot push the elevator button Position the front side of the projector to the desired on the same side height as it Release the elevator buttons in order to lock the elevator feet After making sure that the elevator feet are locked T put the projector down gently To finely If necessary the elevator feet can be manually E twisted to make more precise adjustments Hold the projector when twisting the feet eS ViewSonic 25 Pro9500 Adjusting the lens Use the ZOOM ring to adjust the screen size Use the FOCUS ring to focus the picture FOCUS ring ZOOM ring LOCK Horizontal adjuster lock HORIZONTAL Turn the VERTICAL adjuster fully counter clockwise Then turn it clockwise and adjust adjuster the vertical lens position upward VERTICAL Turn the LOCK counter clockwise to loosen adjuster the lock of the HORIZONTAL adjuster Turn the HORIZONTAL adjuster clockwise or counter clockwise to adjust the horizontal lens position I Turn the
325. the left or right side use the A Y buttons to select any one point on the side and use the lt gt buttons to adjust the distortion of the side e To adjust another corner or side press the ENTER or INPUT button and follow the procedure from step 4 NOTE Each corner and side can be adjusted individually but in some cases it may be adjusted in conjunction with another corner or side This is due to control restrictions and not a malfunction 6 To close the operation press the KEYSTONE button or point at EXIT in the dialog with A V buttons and press the or ENTER button Alternatively point at RETURN in the dialog with the buttons and press the lt or ENTER button to return to the menu in step 1 ViewSonic 29 Pro9500 Using the magnify feature 4 Press the MAGNIFY ON button on the remote control MAGNIFY The picture will be magnified and the MAGNIFY dialog will ON OFF button appear on the screen When the MAGNIFY ON button is pressed for the first time after the projector is turned on the picture will be zoomed by 1 5 times On the dialog triangle marks to show each direction will be displayed 2 While the triangles are displayed on the dialog use the 4 gt cursor buttons to shift the magnifying area A magnifying glass icon will be displayed on the dialog when the MAGNIFY ON button is pressed while the dialog with the triangles is displayed While the magnifying glass icon is displayed on the
326. the same directory 6 PLAY MODE Select the Slideshow mode ONE TIME Play the Slideshow one time ENDLESS Play the Slideshow endless NOTE The settings of the Slideshow are saved to the playlist txt file that is stored in the storage media If the file is not existed it is generated automatically The settings for the START STOP INTERVAL and PLAY MODE are saved to the Playlist If the storage media is under the write protection or the playlist txt is the read only type file it is impossible to change the settings of the Slideshow ViewSonic 87 Pro9500 PC LESS Presentation continued Playlist The Playlist is a DOS format text file which decides the order of displayed still image files in the Thumbnail or Slideshow The playlist file name is playlist txt and it can be edited a computer It is created in the folder that contains the selected image files when the PC LESS Presentation is started or the Slideshow is configured Example of playlist txt files START setting STOP setting INTERVAL setting PLAY MODE setting img001 jpg img002 jpg 600 img003 jpg 700 rot1 img004 jpg SKIP img005 jpg 1000 rot2 SKIP The playlist txt file contains the following information Each piece of information requires to be separated by and at the end of each line 1st line START STOP INTERVAL and PLAY MODE settings 2nd line and after file name inter
327. this port ViewSonic 154 Pro9500 3 4 Port Settings Continued Item Description SNMP Port Configures the SNMP port Port open Click the Enable check box to use SNMP Trap address Configures the destination of the SNMP Trap in IP format The address allows not only IP address but also domain name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network Settings The maximum length of host or domain name is up to 255 characters Download MIB file Downloads a MIB file from the projector twork Bridge Port Configures the Bridge port number Port Number Input the port number Except for 9715 9716 9719 9720 5900 5500 4352 between 1024 and 65535 can be set up It is set to 9717 as the default setting Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection by clicking the Network Restart on the main menu ViewSonic 155 Pro9500 1 1 Displays and configures e mail addressing settings Item Description Click the Enable check box to use the e mail function Send Mail Configure the conditions for sending e mail under the Alert Settings Configures the address of the mail server in IP format The address allows not only IP ad
328. this projector and prepare the required accessories such as a cable in accord with the signal of the device Consult your dealer when the required accessory did not come with the product or the accessory is damaged After making sure that the projector and the devices are turned off perform the connection according to the following instructions Refer to the figures in subsequent pages Before connecting the projector to a network system be sure to read Network Guide too NOTE Do not turn on or off the projector while connected to a device in operation unless that is directed in the manual of the device Otherwise it may cause malfunction in the device or projector The function of some input ports can be selected according to your usage requirements Check the reference page indicated beside each port in the following illustration Be careful not to mistakenly connect a connector to a wrong port Otherwise it may cause malfunction in the device or projector When connecting a connector to a port make sure that the shape of the connector fits the port Tighten the screws to connect a connector equipped with screws to a port Use the cables with straight plugs not L shaped ones as the input ports of the projector are recessed About Plug and Play capability Plug and Play is a system composed of a computer its operating system and peripheral equipment i e display devices This projector is VESA DDC 2B compat
329. ting It is shown in the OPTION menu Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the button of the projector displays a dialog To reset the lamp time select the OK using the button CANCEL gt OK Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp for a suitable indication about the lamp For the lamp replacement see the section Replacing the lamp The filter time is the usage time of the air filter counted after the last resetting It is shown in the OPTION menu Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the button of the projector displays a dialog To reset the filter time select the OK using the gt button CANCEL gt OK Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air filter for a suitable indication about the air filter For the air filter cleaning see the section Cleaning and replacing the air filter continued on next page ViewSonic 59 Pro9500 Description MY BUTTON This item is to assign one of the following functions to MY BUTTON 1 2 on the remote control 1 Use the A Y buttons on the MY BUTTON menu to select a MY BUTTON 1 2 and press the or ENTER button to display the MY BUTTON setup dialog 2 Then using the A Y lt 4 p buttons sets one of the following functions to the chosen button Press the ENTER or INPUT button to save the setting LAN Selects input from LAN port USB TYPE A Selects
330. tion Select From List Before selecting this item your computer and the projectors need to be connected to the same network If the connection is already established select the Select From List From the list of the projectors connected to the network select which projector you would like to send your images Proceed to 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination ViewSonic 118 Pro9500 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued 1 5 1 Passcode connection The unique Passcode system brings you very quick and simple connection to the network The Passcode is a code that expresses the network setting in the projector If you input the code in the LiveViewer in your computer the network setting in the projector and computer can be matched and the connection will be established immediately The section is intended to explain how to use the Passcode 1 Getting the Passcode The Passcode is 12 digit code consisting of alphanumeric characters 1 9 and A Z Example PASSCODE 1234 5678 9ABC The Passcode is given on the projector when the LAN port is selected as input source NOTE Passcode system does not work under the condition below If such is the case establish the connection manually 1 Subnet mask is not Class A or B or C The Passcode system accepts Class A B and C only Class A 255 0 0 0 ClassB 255 255 0 0 Class C 255 255 255 0 There are two methods to get the Passcod
331. tion or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by this function must be optional if the application does not supply it the square root function must still compute square roots These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If dentifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume of a stor
332. to NORMAL and set AUTO ECO MODE to Some kind OFF in the SETUP menu of image 222 degradation The OVER SCAN ratio is too big such as Adjust OVER SCAN in the IMAGE menu smaller flickering Excessive VIDEO NR Change the setting of VIDEO NR in the INPUT menu The FRAME LOCK function cannot work on the current input signal Set FRAME LOCK in the INPUT menu to OFF continued on next page ViewSonic 104 Pro9500 Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects continued Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect Reference page The computer connected to the USB TYPE B port of the projector does not start up RS 232C does not work Network does not work NETWORK BRIDGE function does not work Schedule function does not work When the projector is connected to the network it powers off and on as described below Powers off POWER indicator blinks in orange a few times Goes into standby mode Video files cannot be played properly on a computer on which the LiveViewer was run The computer cannot start up in the current hardware configuration Disconnect the USB cable from the computer then reconnect it after starting up the computer The SAVING function is working Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu The COMMUNICATION TYPE for the CONTROL port is set to NETWORK BRIDGE Select OFF for COMMUNICATION TYPE item in
333. to adjust in the following ways 1 Roughly adjust the four corners in the on STACK of TEMPLATE order below Top left Top right Bottom right Bottom left 2 Fine adjust the four corners in the same way NOTES for all users For details on PERFECT FIT refer to PERFECT FIT of EASY MENU or OPTION menu in the Operating Guide When arranging the projectors side by side Style 2 it is also necessary to adjust the image position of one projector in accordance with the other projector as explained above It is strongly recommended to use a flat screen If a curved or skewed screen is used it is very difficult to align the two images even if you use the pin barrel adjustment of PERFECT FIT Even through fine adjustment of the images from the two projectors it may not be possible to superimpose the images well enough depending on the input signals In this case try the following methods Press the AUTO button on the remote control or execute AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE Operating Guide IMAGE menu on each of the projectors Adjust H POSITION and V POSITION Operating Guide IMAGE menu on each of the projectors Check the RESOLUTION setting in the INPUT menu and change to the same setting if the setting differs between Main and Sub Operating Guide INPUT menu ViewSonic 236 Pro9500 3 STACK menu settings Set the Intellectual Stack operation using the STACK menu NOTE If you are using Simple
334. to the default The horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted e The automatic adjustment operation requires approx 10 seconds Also please note that it may not function correctly with some input e When this function is performed for a video signal a certain extra such as a line may appear outside a picture e When this function is performed for a computer signal a black frame may be displayed on the edge of the screen depending on the PC model e The items adjusted by this function may vary when the FINE or DISABLE is selected for the AUTO ADJUST item of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu Adjusting the position 1 2 Press POSITION button on the remote control when no menu is indicated The POSITION indication will appear on the screen Use the 4 gt cursor buttons to adjust the picture position When you want to reset the operation press RESET button on the remote control during the operation To complete this operation press POSITION button again Even if ou do not do anything the dialog will automatically disappear Hem few i i POSITION bution e When this function is performed on a video signal or an s video signal some image such as an extra line may appear at outside of the picture e When this function is performed on a video signal or s video signal the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN in IMAGE menu setting It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10 e If PO
335. tortion correction When the projector is suspended from the ceiling this feature will not function properly so select the OFF This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is on Using the buttons turns on off the DIRECT POWER ON function ON lt gt OFF When set to the ON the lamp in projector will be automatically turned on without the usual procedure only when the projector is supplied with DIRECT POWER the power after the power was cut while the lamp was on ON This function does not work as long as the power has been supplied to the projector while the lamp is off After turning the lamp on by the DIRECT POWER ON function if neither input nor operation is detected for about 30 minutes the projector is turned off even though the AUTO POWER OFF function is disabled continued on next page ViewSonic 57 9500 Description AUTO POWER OFF USB TYPEB Using the A Y buttons adjusts the time to count down to automatically turn the projector off Long max 99 minutes lt gt Short min 0 minute DISABLE AUTO POWER OFF AUTO POWER OFF ENABLE DISABLE S RETURN RETURN When the time is set to 0 the projector is not turned off automatically When the time is setto 1 to 99 and when the passed time with no signal or an unsuitable signal reaches at the set time the projector lamp will be turned off If one of the projector s
336. tremely dirty dip soft cloth in water or a neutral cleaner diluted in water and wipe lightly after wringing well Then wipe lightly with a soft dry cloth ANWARNING p Before caring make sure the power cord is not plugged in and then allow the projector to cool sufficiently The care in a high temperature state of the projector could cause a burn and or malfunction to the projector gt Never try to care for the inside of the projector personally Doing is so dangerous gt Avoid wetting the projector or inserting liquids in the projector It could result in a fire an electric shock and or malfunction to the projector Do not put anything containing water cleaners or chemicals near the projector Do not use aerosols or sprays ANCAUTION Please take right care of the projector according to the following Incorrect care could cause not only an injury but adverse influence such as discoloration peeling paint etc gt Do not use cleaners or chemicals other than those specified in this manual gt Do not polish or wipe with hard objects NOTICE Do not directly touch the lens surface with hands ViewSonic 97 Pro9500 iroubleshootimg If an abnormal operation should occur stop using the projector immediately Otherwise if a problem occurs with the projector the following checks and measures are recommended before requesting repair If this does not resolve the problem please contact your dealer or service comp
337. u and configure each item Refer to item 3 8 Date Time Settings for further information 4 Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE battery for the built in clock may be dead if the clock loses time even when the date and time have been set correctly Replace the battery by following the instructions on replacing the battery Replacing the internal clock battery in the Quick Start Guide The internal clock s time may not remain accurate Using SNTP is recommended to maintain accurate time ViewSonic 187 Pro9500 7 4 Command Control via the Network You can configure and control the projector via the network using RS 232C commands Communication Port The following two ports are assigned for the command control 23 Network Control Port1 Port 23 9715 Network Control Port2 Port 9715 NOTE Command control is available only via the specified port above Command Control Settings Configure the following items from a web browser when command control is used Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Port Settings on the main menu tobe inae 4 Click the Enable check box to open Network Control Port1 Port 23 to use TCP 23 Click the Enable check box for the Auth
338. u start the Slideshow input source will be automatically switched to the USB TYPE A port Image files stored in the root directory of the USB memory device will be displayed for the scheduled Slideshow Please refer to Troubleshooting in the Operating Guide in case scheduled functions events are not executed appropriately as you ve set ViewSonic 161 Pro9500 3 8 Date Time Settings Displays and configures the date and time settings Description Current Date Configures the current date in year month day format Current Time Configures the current time in hour minute second format Click the ON check box to enable daylight savings time and set the following items Start Configures the date and time daylight savings time begins Daylight Savings Time Month Configures the month daylight savings time begins 1 12 Configures the week of the month daylight savings time begins First 2 3 4 Last Configures the day of the week daylight savings time begins Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat hour Configures the hour daylight savings time begins 0 23 minute Configures the minute daylight savings time begins 0 59 Configures the date and time daylight savings time ends Configures the month daylight savings time ends 1 12 Configures the week of the month daylight savings time ends First 2 3 4 Last Configures the day of the week daylight savings time ends Sun
339. uilt in speaker does not work While the image signal from the input port chosen in step 1 is projected the audio signal from the input port selected in step 2 is output to both the AUDIO OUT port and built in speaker of this projector However the built in speaker does not work when SPEAKER is set to OFF 1 Choose a picture input port using the A F buttons Choose STANDBY to select the sound output in the standby mode 2 Select one of the AUDIO IN ports using lt P gt buttons TS Select X to mute the sound from the input port or in the standby mode chosen in the step 1 the AUDIO SOURCE window symbolizes the audio signal from the HDMI port It can be selected only for the picture input from the HDMI port Even if the projector is in the standby mode cooling fans may work and make noises when the built in speaker is in operation Closed Caption is automatically activated when is selected and an input signal containing C C is received This function is available only when the signal is NTSC for VIDEO or S VIDEO or 4801 60 for COMPONENT COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER 2 and when AUTO is selected for DISPLAY in the C C menu under the SCREEN menu VOLUME o ooooeeeoe 900000080 o leeeocoooooe X o AUDIO SOURCE continued on next page ViewSonic 49 Pro9500 Description HDMI AUDIO MIC LEVEL
340. ulting from Accident misuse neglect fire water lightning or other acts of nature unauthorized product modification unauthorized attempted repair or failure to follow instructions supplied with the product Any damage of the product due to shipment Causes external to the product such as electrical power fluctuations or failure Use of supplies or parts not meeting ViewSonic s specifications Normal wear and tear Any other cause which does not relate to a product defect 3 Any product exhibiting a condition commonly known as image burn in which results when a static image is displayed on the product for an extended period of time 4 Removal installation insurance and set up service charges T ooloc How to get service For information about receiving service under warranty contact ViewSonic Customer Support Please refer to the attached Customer Support page You will need to provide your product s serial number so please record the product information in the space provided below on your purchase for your future use Please retain your receipt of proof of purchase to support your warranty claim For Your Records Product Name Model Number Document Number Serial Number Purchase Date Extended Warranty Purchase Y N If so what date does warranty expire 1 To obtain warranty service you will be required to provide a the original dated sales slip b your name c your address d a descr
341. ut manually is different depending on how you want to connect the projector and computer Wireless LAN The projector is required to be connected to an access point by a LAN cable Wired LAN If you use the wired LAN go to Wired LAN ViewSonic 129 Pro9500 1 7 Configuring the network settings manually continued Wireless LAN 1 The setting on the access point 7 Enter the following information PE R s SSID WirelessAccessPoint example D e _ Encryption WEP64bit example Mode 1 INFRASTRUCTURE Encryption key 2 example Mode INFRASTRUCTURE Enter Wireless Access Point Configuration information lt Back gt Exit 2 Click the Next 3 Enter the following information that is set in Enter the following information the projector 3 TES IP address 192 168 1 10 example Subnet mask Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 example Enter Projector IP Address and Subnet mask Bak Connect Exit 4 Click the Connect 5 The wireless connection will be established Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 1 Contact the network administrator to find out the setting on the access point 2 f you use an encryption you need to set it Contact the network administrator to check the encryption key that is set in the projector The encryption key is always shown as 3 To find the network settin
342. ution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s Source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licen
343. val time rotation setting and skip setting interval time It can be set from 0 to 999900 ms with an increment of 100 ms rotation setting rot1 means a rotation at 90 degrees clockwise rot2 and rot3 increase another 90 degrees in order skip setting SKIP means that the image will not be displayed in the Slideshow NOTE maximum length in a line on the playlist txt file is 255 characters including linefeed If any line exceeds the limit the playlist txt file becomes invalid Up to 999 files can be registered to the Playlist However if some folders exist in the same directory the limit number is decreased by the number of folders Any files over the limit will not be shown in the Slideshow If the storage device is protected or does not have sufficient space the playlist txt file cannot be created For the Slideshow settings refer to the section Slideshow mode ViewSonic 88 Pro9500 USB Display The projector can display images transferred from a computer via an USB cable Hardware and software requirement for computer OS One of the following 32 bit version only Windows XP Home Edition Professional Edition Windows Vista Home Basic Home Premium Business Ultimate Enterprise Windows 7 Starter Home Basic Home Premium Professional Ultimate Enterprise CPU Pentium 4 2 8 GHz or higher Graphic card 16 bit XGA or higher Memory 512 MB or higher Hard disk space 3
344. wSonic 4 Foradditional information or the name of the nearest ViewSonic service center contact ViewSonic Limitation of implied warranties There are no warranties express or implied which extend beyond the description contained herein including the implied warranty of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Exclusion of damages ViewSonic s liability is limited to the cost of repair or replacement of the product ViewSonic shall not be liable for 1 Damage to other property caused by any defects in the product damages based upon inconvenience loss of use of the product loss of time loss of profits loss of business opportunity loss of goodwill interference with business relationships or other commercial loss even if advised of the possibility of such damages 2 other damages whether incidental consequential or otherwise 3 Any claim against the customer by any other party Effect of state law This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state Some states do not allow limitations on implied warranties and or do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations and exclusions may not apply to you Sales outside the U S A and Canada For warranty information and service on ViewSonic products sold outside of the U S A and Canada contact ViewSonic or your local ViewSonic dealer The warranty period f
345. wSonic 141 Pro9500 2 1 Using the LiveViewer continued Hold button The image on screen is temporally frozen The last image before the button is clicked is remained on screen You can revise the image data on your computer without showing it on the projector s screen Display mode button The button switches the Single PC mode and Multi PC mode Connect button The screen to select the connection mode is displayed Go to item 1 5 Option button The option screen is displayed Web control button Starts the Web browser on your computer and displays Web control screen to control the projector and change various settings for the projector Information button The version of the LiveViewer is displayed 0 Close button The network is disconnected and the LiveViewer is closed Minimize button The displayed icon changes as shown below depending on the status of the LiveViewer If the icon is double clicked the last type of the main menu will be shown on screen Connected Disconnected Not connected Hold E ViewSonic 142 Pro9500 2 1 Using the LiveViewer continued 2 1 2 Displaying the status 1 Indicator The indicator shows the following status Indicator Status Note The network connection to the projector is ED Not connected not established yet Eg Hold The network connection is established but the image transmissions on hold The network connection is establishe
346. waarop een gebruiksrecht is gevestigd Raadpleeg de gebruiksrechtovereenkomsten van alle software op de volgende pagina s en gebruiksrechtovereenkomsten van alle software op de webpagina voor meer details over de gebruiksvoorwaarden enz Aangezien de volgende gebruiksrechtovereenkomsten niet door ons maar door derden werden opgesteld zijn ze oorspronkelijk opgesteld in de Engelse taal Omdat het programma de softwaremodule een gratis gebruiksrecht heeft wordt het programma zo ter beschikking gesteld zonder enige garantie uitdrukkelijk noch impliciet voor zover bij wet toegestaan En we aanvaarden geen aansprakelijkheid noch betalen een schadevergoeding uit voor eventueel verlies inclusief maar niet beperkt tot verlies van gegevens nauwkeurigheid of compatibiliteit met interface tussen andere programma s door de respectieve software en of het gebruik van de respectieve software voor zover bij wet toegestaan ViewSonic 264 Pro9500 NEDER LANDS Contrato de licenca do utilizador final para o software do projector Software no projector consiste no n mero plural de m dulos de software independentes e a residem os nossos direitos de autor e ou direitos de autor de terceiros para cada um desses m dulos de software O projector tamb m utiliza m dulos de software que desenvolvemos e ou produzimos E a residem 0 nossos direitos de autor e propriedade intelectual para esse software e itens relacionados mas n o limitados aos docume
347. ways muted Please see AUDIO SOURCE item of AUDIO menu e C C Closed Caption is automatically activated when sound is muted and an input signal containing C C is received This function is available only when the signal is NTSC for VIDEO or S VIDEO or 480i 60 for COMPONENT COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2 and when AUTO is selected for DISPLAY in the C C menu under the SCREEN menu Selecting an input signal 1 Press INPUT button on the projector INPUT Each time you press the button the projector switches its putton input port from the current port as below gt COMPUTER IN1 gt COMPUTER IN2 gt LAN x VIDEO USB TYPEA S VIDEO USB TYPE B __ COMPONENT Y Cb Pb Cr Pr lt e While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu the projector will keep checking the ports in above order repeatedly till an input signal is detected e t may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port im j continued on next page ViewSonic 22 Pro9500 Selecting an input signal continued 1 Press COMPUTER button on the remote control COMPUTER button Each time you press the button the projector switches its input port from the current port as below COMPUTER IN1 gt COMPUTER IN2 gt LAN USBTYPEB USBTYPEA e While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu the projector will keep checking every port sequentially OO OO till an input signal is detected I
348. will come up If you have already made 10 profile data you cannot make a new one until you delete a Profile name stored data Adapter name 11a b g Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express Adapter Wireless settings SSID Input all information required for your network 2 zi Encryption key connection E E If you want to clear the information you input RENT click the Clear Subnetmask Computer settings address 1 Subnet mask Clear Ok Cancel 3 Click the OK after all information is set If you don t want to store it click the Cancel 4 The new profile data is shown in the profile list if you click the OK NOTE When you make a new profile data it is strongly recommended to check that the new data can work properly by selecting the data at the Profile connection f you change a network adapter on your computer make a new profile data for the adapter ViewSonic 137 Pro9500 1 9 Profile data continued 1 9 3 Editing Profile data If necessary the profile data can be edited on the Manual Configuration screen cB 1 Select the Profile and select one of the data listed in the window My Connection Projectorname address Last connected Projector 1 192 168 1101 1130 2009 3 23 24 Projector 2 192 168 1 102 11 30 2009 3 22 24 PM Projector 3 192 168 1 103 11 30 2009 3 21 24 2 Click the Edit
349. y modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance ViewSonic 277 9 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your acceptance of this License to do So and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License 11 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of pat
350. y data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a special exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and distribute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above b Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work 8 You may not cop
351. yboard function of this product does not work correctly please check the following When a USB cable connects this projector with a computer having a built in pointing device e g track ball like a laptop PC open BIOS setup menu then select the external mouse and disable the built in pointing device because the built in pointing device may have priority to this function Windows 95 OSR 2 1 or higher is required for this function And also this function may not work depending on the computer s configurations and mouse drivers This function can work with the computer which can operate general USB mouse or keyboard You cannot do things like press two buttons at once for instance pressing two buttons at the same time to move the mouse pointer diagonally This function is activated only when the projector is working properly This function is not available in any of the following cases While the lamp is warming up The POWER indicator blinks in green When either USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port is selected While displaying BLANK TEMPLATE or MY IMAGE screen When any menu is displayed on the screen While using the cursor buttons to operate the sound or screen functions such as adjusting the sound volume correcting the keystone correcting the picture position and magnifying the screen ViewSonic 20 Pro9500 Turning on the power 1 Make sure that the power cord is firmly and correctly connected to the projector a

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Radio multibanda SWED 100 A1 Ricevitore universale  ほこりセンサ 製品詳細  Philips Digital Photo Album SPH8408  イタリアン ノンスリップ 取扱説明書  Recorder and Player  Gms-d1 GPS Antenna Module Data Sheet  Manual de instrucciones  avis sur les recommandations du rapport sirugue - UIMM 35-56  Lochinvar CW495-2066 User's Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file